JP2022059079A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can enhance the attractiveness of a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first pattern control means which performs variation display of a first pattern to be displayed in a first pattern display device, using a game ball entry to a first ball entry section as a trigger; and second pattern control means which performs variation display of a second pattern to be displayed in a second pattern display device, using a game ball entry to a second ball entry section as a trigger. The second pattern control means starts variation display of the second pattern when the first pattern control means performs variation display of the first pattern. On the other hand, the first pattern control means prohibits the start of the variation display of the first pattern when the second pattern control means performs variation display of the second pattern.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various techniques have been proposed for the purpose of improving the interest of games and providing sounder games (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and providing a sounder game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[form]
A first symbol control means for variablely displaying the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display device, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry portion.
A second symbol control means for variablely displaying the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display device, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second symbol control means starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means variablely displays the first symbol.
The first symbol control means is a gaming machine, which prohibits the second symbol control means from starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is variablely displayed. ..

According to the above-mentioned form of the gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. It is a front view of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface 41a which are variable-displayed in a liquid crystal display apparatus 41. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is a time chart explaining an example (example 1) of the processing executed by a pachinko machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which shows the skip effect. It is a time chart explaining an example (example 2) of the processing executed by a pachinko machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect performed by a pachinko machine 10. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a skip command. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the round number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry counter setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening limit time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball launch control process. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the skip execution command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st non-skippable command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd non-skippable command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a time chart explaining an example of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st start port in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st start port in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process (main control) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball launch control processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 1st start port in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process in the modification 8. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing in the modification 8. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a skip promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the skip suppression effect. It is a time chart which shows the timing to execute the skip promotion effect in the modification 11. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure (example 1) of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure (example 2) of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the game board 30 which includes the distribution mechanism 150. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the distribution mechanism 150 distributes a game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the game board 30 in the modification 15. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the game board 30 in the modification 16. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state until the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 enters the second start opening 34d.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
A3. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
A6. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Modification example:
F. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:

A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of the big hit lottery, the big hit winning, the reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation acceptance means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25 in the same manner as the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with his right hand.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays images for design and production.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 is a game having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player or the operation of the game ball launch button 26. The game ball launch mechanism is controlled so as to launch the ball. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 by receiving the supply of game balls from the tank rail 55 having the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a general winning opening 32, a central side first starting opening 33 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a first starting opening 33), a right side first starting opening 44 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a first starting opening 44), and a like. A second starting port 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entry openings into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side are entry ports where game balls can enter. The central side first starting port 33 is provided in the lower center of the game board 30, and the right first starting port 44 is provided in the lower right side of the front view of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a big hit lottery described later is executed. .. Further, the right first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right first starting port 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the right first starting port 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be open for a predetermined period when a lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b is won.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. More specifically, in the second starting port 34, when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player so that the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum strength, or the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player. In this case, it is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 enters. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a big hit lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with a non-electric accessory 34a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The non-electric accessory 34a operates from an open state to a closed state and from a closed state to an open state without using electric power. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, it operates from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 when the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the non-electric accessory 34a operates from the open state to the closed state and enters the second starting port 34. A game ball cannot enter.

The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are provided with through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. As described above, the through gate 35a is mechanically connected to the non-electric accessory 34a, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the non-electric accessory 34a operates from the closed state to the open state. On the other hand, the through gate 35b is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 44a. In terms of tools, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 44a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35b is arranged on the upstream side of the first start port 44 on the right side with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down the game area PA after passing through and is on the right side. It is possible to enter the ball into the first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As described above, when the game ball enters the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, or the second start port 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a corresponds to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the display is performed, a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display unit to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is referred to as the first variable time, and is referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is referred to as the second variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c made of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side) according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44 are reserved as a total of the two first starting ports. In this embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second starting port 34 is not held. That is, the condition that the second symbol is variablely displayed is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 during the period when the second symbol is not variablely displayed, while the second symbol is. It is a configuration that does not hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 during the period of variable display.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35b is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41 adjusts to the variable display or the predetermined display when the first symbol display unit 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44. The variable display or the predetermined display of the design is performed. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 41, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 makes a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is limited to displaying the fluctuation of the symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side, or the second starting port 34. Instead, it also displays the effect during the open / close execution mode, which shifts when a big hit is won. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol for a first liquid crystal display that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal display symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the liquid crystal display device 41 variablely displays the symbols 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal display symbol. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, a first liquid crystal display symbol display area 41b, which is a region in which an image of the first liquid crystal display is displayed, is set on the display surface 41a. Further, the display surface 41a is an area for displaying a second liquid crystal symbol, which is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The second liquid crystal display area 41c is set.

In the first liquid crystal display area 41b, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal display symbols shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically above. A variable display is made that scrolls from to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. To. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the first liquid crystal display in the first liquid crystal display area 41b is not limited to the above mode. For example, there are various display modes of the first liquid crystal display such as the number of symbol rows in the symbol display area 41b for the first liquid crystal display, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. Aspects can be adopted.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second liquid crystal display symbol is displayed in the second liquid crystal display symbol display area 41c. In the present embodiment, as the second liquid crystal display symbol, a character image imitating a creature inhabiting the sea such as an octopus, a turtle, or a crab is displayed in the second liquid crystal display area 41c.

The aspect of the second liquid crystal display symbol in the second liquid crystal display area 41c is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, as the second liquid crystal display symbol, various modes can be adopted for displaying the second liquid crystal display symbol such as geometric figures such as circles, quadrangles, and triangles, and numbers. Further, an aspect in which the second liquid crystal display symbol is not displayed may be adopted. In this case, the second liquid crystal display area 41c is not set on the display surface 41a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 is displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls held in the center side first starting port 33 and the right side first starting port 44 is four in total of the two first starting ports. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 for displaying and the second synchronous display for performing blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the second liquid crystal display symbol display area 41c, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2, but the display surface 41a is these. A configuration may be adopted in which a part or all of the display of is not displayed.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various types such as a general winning opening 32, a central side first starting opening 33, a right side first starting opening 44, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35b, and a variable winning device 36 are used. Various detection sensors provided at the entrance and through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the central first starting port 33, the right first starting port 44, and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 44b that opens and closes the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44. And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 44a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Display control of.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting opening (center). When the entry of the game ball into the side first start port 33 and the right side first start port 44) is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first 2 When the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board provided that the touch sensor 25a is on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first symbol and the second symbol are variable-displayed. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for big hit lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a big hit lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach determination as to whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed out of the pattern sequence.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are changed. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the determination processing execution area 64c.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set when the game ball enters the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entry. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is determined. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34 after moving to the execution area 64c, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c and then stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is collated with the winning / failing table, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set when the game ball enters the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set to the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the above, and is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side), the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is determined. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34 after moving to the execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is stored. It is collated with the reach determination table stored in, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. However, when the result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row Z2, so that the reach is achieved. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

The combination of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, a combination of a set of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is also referred to as hold information.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35b. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, and then the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a in the open state by using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 44a is controlled in the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in the closed state.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the big-hit lottery. At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44. The hit / miss table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 and the hit / miss table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. , Are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a pass / fail table for the second start port (low). Four hit / miss tables, one for the probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the second start port (for the high probability mode), are stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 7A shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 7A, there are two (for example, “7” and “341”) values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port. The value of is set. Then, among the values from 0 to 599, the values other than these values are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port, eight (for example, "7", "for example", "7", " 39 ”,“ 198 ”,“ 253 ”,“ 341 ”,“ 411 ”,“ 497 ”,“ 576 ”) values are set. Then, among the values from 0 to 599, the values other than these values are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as jackpots are arbitrary.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 8A shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 8B shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode). As shown in FIG. 8A, two values are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port, and the jackpot that is a jackpot is a jackpot. As the value of the random number C1, 550 values are set. Then, among the values from 0 to 599, the values other than these values are out of the range.

Here, the "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode, which will be described later. be. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), eight values are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port, and small hits are made. As the value of the jackpot random number C1, 550 values are set. Then, among the values from 0 to 599, the values other than these values are out of the range. As described above, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port as well, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the low probability mode. ing. Further, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port, 550 values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a small hit are set in both the hit / miss table for low probability and the hit / miss table for high probability. 2 When a big hit lottery is executed triggered by a game ball entering the starting port, it is set to be a small hit with a high probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, the generation of a game ball into the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. In the present embodiment, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is continued until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b is 10. Is set. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b is 6. ..

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. In the low-frequency winning mode of the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 seconds. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 9A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 9B shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side, and the distribution for the second starting port is used. The table is referred to during a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the distribution table for the first starting port has 16R as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44. Probability change jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. , The lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a big hit in which the high probability mode is set.

In the 8R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. , The lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a big hit in which the high probability mode is set.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. , The lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a big hit in which the low probability mode is set.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 11" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "12 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. However, "20-29" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 9B, a 2R normal jackpot is set as a jackpot type based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 in the distribution table for the second starting port.

In the 2R normal jackpot, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is two times (two rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode. , The lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is a big hit in which the low probability mode is set.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, all the values of "0 to 29" among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29" are set to correspond to the 2R normal jackpot.

The opening / closing execution mode that shifts when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit is that the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed once (1 round), and the opening / closing door 36b is opened once. Is set to continue until 1.8 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b is 6. Then, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is not changed, and the lottery mode as it is is maintained.

Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is out of order, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed and the lottery mode is not changed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44. There is a difference between the case of a big hit and the case of a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. ..

A3. Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 10 is a time chart illustrating an example (example 1) of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. The process shown at the time Tm1 to the time Tm4 shown in FIG. 10 is a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the game ball enters the first starting port (in this example, the central side first starting port 33). Shows. In the process shown from the time Tm5 to the time Tm12, after the game ball enters the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side), the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at a predetermined timing. The process to be executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is shown.

When the player starts the operation (rotation operation) of the operation handle 25 at the time Tm1, the game ball is launched into the game area PA by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In this example, it is assumed that the player adjusts the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 on the central side.

Then, when the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 and flowing down the game area PA enters the first start port, the detection sensor for the first start port detects the entry of the game ball at time Tm2. In this example, the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the center side.

When the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the center side, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm3, the first symbol display unit 37a is the first. Starts the variable display of the symbol of. The first symbol display unit 37a variablely displays the first symbol during the period from the time Tm3 to the time Tm4, that is, during the fluctuation time ct1, and then stops and displays the first symbol. The fluctuation time ct1 (from time Tm3 to time Tm4), which is the time for the first symbol to display the fluctuation, is preset based on the fluctuation type counter CS acquired before the first symbol display unit 37a starts the fluctuation display. It is the time that was done. In addition, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port this time is "missing".

The pachinko machine 10 executes a first symbol effect prepared for disengagement as an effect between the time Tm3 and the time Tm4 when the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variation of the first symbol. Specifically, an effect that combines the display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 41, the audio output from the speaker 46, the driving of a movable accessory, and the like is executed. Then, at the end of the effect for the first symbol for disengagement, the stop display of the first symbol is performed with the combination of the symbols corresponding to the disengagement.

Next, the processing shown from the time Tm5 to the time Tm12 will be described. It is assumed that the player continuously adjusts the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the center side from the time Tm1.

When the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 and flowing down the game area PA by the player operating the operation handle 25 enters the central side first start port 33, at time Tm5, for the first start port. The detection sensor detects the entry of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the center side, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm6, the first symbol display unit 37a is the first. Starts the variable display of the symbol of. In this example as well, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port is out of order. Therefore, at the same time that the variation display of the first symbol is started, the pachinko machine 10 starts the effect for the first symbol for disengagement.

The player recognizes that the variable display of the first symbol and the effect for the first symbol for the deviation have started, and it is unlikely that the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the game times related to the effect is a big hit. Recognizing that, I hope to shorten the number of games being played. Then, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at the time Tm7 for the purpose of shortening the game times during execution, the game area PA from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is provided, provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. A game ball is fired at. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball in the game ball launch mechanism 81 so that the probability of entering the second starting port 34 is high. Fire the game ball into the game area PA. Further, in the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 3, when the operation handle 25 is rotated and operated by the player so that the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum strength, or the game ball is launched by the player. When the button 26 is operated, the second starting port 34 is arranged at a position on the game area PA into which the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 enters. That is, the game ball launch button 26 enables the player to intentionally urge the player to satisfy the condition that the second symbol is variablely displayed.

When the game ball launched into the game area PA by the player operating the game ball launch button 26 at the time Tm7 enters the second start port 34, the detection sensor for the second start port is used for the game at the time Tm8. Detects the entry of a ball. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm9, the second symbol display unit 37b is the second symbol. Starts the variable display of.

The second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol in a variable manner during the period from the time Tm9 to the time Tm10, that is, during the fluctuation time ct4, and then stops and displays the second symbol. The fluctuation time ct4 (from time Tm9 to time Tm10), which is the time for the second symbol to display the fluctuation, is preset based on the fluctuation type counter CS acquired before the second symbol display unit 37b starts the fluctuation display. It is the time that was done. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired with the ball entering the second starting port this time is "small hit". In the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery executed based on the entry into the second starting port 34 is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set to 1 second. There is. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time ct4 is 1 second.

The second symbol display unit 37b stops the variation display of the second symbol after the lapse of the variation time ct4 from the start of the variation display of the second symbol display unit 37b, that is, at the time Tm10.

At this time, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a that was displaying the variation is the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b even though the initially set variation time ct2 has not elapsed. At the timing (time Tm10) when the symbol displays the stop display, the variable display shifts to the stop display. As a result, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b display a stop display at almost the same time. Then, at the time Tm11, the variable winning device is opened once when the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 34 is a small hit. In this case, the time for the variable winning device to open is 0.2 seconds.

The above processing will be specifically described. The fluctuation time ct2, which is the time when the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a displays the fluctuation, is set in advance based on the fluctuation type counter CS acquired before the first symbol display unit 37a starts the fluctuation display. It is set. Therefore, normally, the first symbol display unit 37a variablely displays the first symbol when the game ball enters the central first starting port 33, and the time for variablely displaying the first symbol. When the fluctuation time tc2 preset as the fluctuation time is elapsed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the combination of the first symbols stopped and displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a is a big hit. When the combination corresponds to the "missing" in the lottery, and the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is the combination corresponding to the "small hit" or the "big hit" in the big hit lottery. Will also stop and display the first symbol when the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is set based on the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a and the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b. , The time is shortened to a shorter time (variation time ct3 in this example) than the preset fluctuation time (variation time ct2 in this example).

In the present embodiment, when the second symbol starts the variable display after the first symbol starts the variable display, the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed operates the variable winning device 36. When the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed is not the combination of symbols and the combination of the symbols for operating the variable winning device 36, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset fluctuation time. Shorten to.

In the present embodiment, the first symbol combination for operating the variable winning device 36 is a combination of symbols corresponding to the "big hit" in the big hit lottery. Further, the second symbol combination for operating the variable winning device 36 is a combination of symbols corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit" in the big hit lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 10, the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols corresponding to "off", which is a combination of symbols that does not operate the variable winning device 36, and is displayed as a second symbol. Since the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the "small hit" which is the combination of symbols for operating the variable winning device 36, the pachinko machine 10 sets the fluctuation time of the first symbol from the fluctuation time ct2. The fluctuation time is shortened to tc3, and when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the player intentionally inserts the game ball into the second starting port 34 by operating the game ball launch button 26 while the first symbol is variable and displayed, and the second The symbol of 2 is displayed in a variable manner. If the first symbol to be stopped and displayed is "off" and the second symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, the first symbol is displayed. Is also stopped and displayed. In other words, the game ball launch button 26 is a process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a shorter time than the preset fluctuation time by the player operating the first symbol while the fluctuation display is displayed. Allows the player to intentionally encourage. The game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 by the player rotating the operation handle 25 to launch the game ball into the game area PA, but the player can launch the game ball launch button. It is easily possible by manipulating 26. That is, the game ball launch button 26 plays a role of assisting the player in the operation of launching the game ball.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 displays fluctuations when the fluctuation time of the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. The "skip effect" that suggests that the first symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the effect for the first symbol, which was set to be executed in the fluctuation time ct2 from the time Tm6 to the time Tm12 at the time when the first symbol starts the variation display, is interrupted at the time Tm9. At the same time, the skip effect is executed from the time Tm9 to the time Tm10 at which the first symbol and the second symbol display the stop, that is, during the fluctuation time ct4 of the second symbol. The skip effect is an effect that omits / omits (skips) the variable display of the first symbol or the effect for the first symbol, and suggests that the variable display of the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a skip effect. FIG. 11A shows an example of an image displayed on the display surface 41a when the skip effect is executed. In the skip effect in the present embodiment, the female character omits / omits (skips) the variable display of the first symbol or the effect for the first symbol, and the first symbol that is variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a production that suggests.

After executing the skip effect, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the first symbol and the second symbol on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, respectively, at the time Tm10, and displays the display surface. A liquid crystal display symbol, which is an image corresponding to the first symbol and the second symbol that have been stopped and displayed, is displayed on 41a.

FIG. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (example 2) of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In this example, an example in which the pachinko machine 10 does not shorten the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time will be described.

When the player starts the operation of the operation handle 25 at the time Tm1, the game ball is launched into the game area PA by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In this example, the player adjusts the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 on the central side.

Then, when the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 and flowing down the game area PA enters the first start port, the detection sensor for the first start port detects the entry of the game ball at time Tm2. In this example, the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the center side.

When the game ball enters the first start port 33 on the center side, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm3, the first symbol display unit 37a is the first. Starts the variable display of the symbol of. In this example, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port is "big hit".

When the first symbol display unit 37a starts the variable display of the first symbol, the pachinko machine 10 executes the first symbol effect prepared for the jackpot as an effect. Specifically, an effect that combines the display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 41, the audio output from the speaker 46, the driving of a movable accessory, and the like is executed.

When the player who recognizes that the variation display of the first symbol and the effect for the first symbol has started operates the game ball launch button 26 at the time Tm4, the game is performed on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. A game ball is launched from the ball launch mechanism 81 into the game area PA. As described above, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 determines the launch intensity of the game ball in the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Is adjusted to be high, and a game ball is fired in the game area PA.

When the game ball launched into the game area PA by the player operating the game ball launch button 26 at the time Tm4 enters the second start port 34, the detection sensor for the second start port is used for the game at the time Tm5. Detects the entry of a ball. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm6, the second symbol display unit 37b is the second symbol. Starts the variable display of.

The second symbol display unit 37b variablely displays the second symbol during the period from the time Tm6 to the time Tm7, that is, during the variable time ct2, and then stops and displays the second symbol. The fluctuation time ct2 (from time Tm6 to time Tm7), which is the time for the second symbol to display the fluctuation, is set in advance based on the fluctuation type counter CS acquired before the second symbol display unit 37b starts the fluctuation display. It is a set time. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired with the entry into the second starting port this time is "missing". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry into the second starting port 34 is "off" is set to 1 second. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time ct2 is 1 second.

The second symbol display unit 37b stops the variation display of the second symbol after the lapse of the variation time ct2 from the start of the variation display of the second symbol display unit 37b, that is, at the time Tm7. That is, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the stop of the second symbol.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 11 (Example 1), the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a, which was displayed in a variable manner, is displayed as a stop display by the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b. At the same time, the variable display was changed to the stop display, but in this example (Example 2), the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b of the first symbol display unit 37a displaying the variable is stopped. Even at the timing of display, the variable display is continued without shifting to the stop display. That is, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is not shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-skippable effect between the time Tm6 when the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variable display and the time Tm7 where the stop display is displayed, that is, during the variable time ct2. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, after the game ball enters the center side first start port 33 (or the right side first start port 44) and the first symbol starts to change and display, the second start port When the game ball enters the 34 and the second symbol starts the variation display, and the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is not executed. , Perform a non-skippable effect.

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 13A shows an example of a non-skippable effect. FIG. 13A shows a display surface 41a for displaying the non-skippable effect. The non-skippable effect in the present embodiment is an effect suggesting that the female character cannot omit / omit (skip) the variable display of the first symbol or the effect for the first symbol. In other words, the non-skippable effect is an effect that suggests that the first symbol does not stop and display when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, the non-skippable effect is inserted during the execution of the first symbol effect for the jackpot triggered by the entry of the ball into the central first start port 33 ( It is executed (as a so-called cut-in effect). That is, on the display surface 41a, the image of the non-skippable effect is displayed by superimposing it on the image of the first symbol effect for the jackpot.

A player who recognizes that the first symbol is not stopped and displayed even though the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34, operates the game ball launch button 26 again at the time Tm8 to play the game. Even when the game ball launched in the area PA enters the second starting port 34, the detection sensor for the second starting port detects the entry of the game ball at the time Tm9, and from the time Tm10 to the time Tm11. , The first symbol display unit 37a, in which the variation display of the second symbol and the non-skippable effect are executed and the variation display is performed, also at the timing when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b displays the stop display. The variable display is continued without shifting to the stop display. That is, the variable time shortening process is not executed.

After that, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 again at the time Tm12 and the game ball launched into the game area PA enters the second starting port 34, the second start at the time Tm13. The detection sensor for the starting port detects the entry of the game ball. Then, from the time Tm14 to the time Tm15, the variation display of the second symbol is executed, and the jackpot notification effect is executed.

The jackpot notification effect is a case where the result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side) is a jackpot. , Is executed when the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is not more than a predetermined time.

More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the first starting opening 33 on the center side or the first starting opening 44 on the right side) is "big hit". In, after the first symbol has started the variable display due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port, the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 and the second symbol has started the variable display. In this case, if the process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time is not executed, the non-skippable effect or the jackpot notification effect is executed. Whether to execute the non-skippable effect or the jackpot notification effect is selected and determined according to the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol. In the present embodiment, if the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is longer than 5 seconds at the time of executing the non-skippable effect or the jackpot notification effect, the non-skippable effect is executed and the first symbol is executed. If the remaining time of the fluctuation time is 5 seconds or less, the jackpot notification effect is executed.

The jackpot notification effect is the first start port (center side) by displaying an image indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot on the display surface 41a, lighting various lamps 47 included in the pachinko machine 10, and outputting voice from the speaker 46. This is an effect of notifying the player that the result of the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44) is a "big hit".

FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot notification effect. FIG. 13B shows a display surface 41a for displaying the jackpot notification effect. The jackpot notification effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the female character notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit". By executing the jackpot effect, the player recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is a "big hit", and at the same time, the game ball is sent to the second starting opening 34. Recognize that the reason why the first symbol did not stop and display even though the ball was entered is that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port was "big hit". do.

After the jackpot notification effect is executed, the first symbol of the combination indicating that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. Further, on the effective line L of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display surface 41a, a combination of liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first symbol stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed.

After that, a special game state effect including an opening effect, a round effect, and an ending effect is executed, and the variable winning device opens and closes from the time Tm17 to the time Tm18.

The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has been described above.

A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

The MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S104).

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step S201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44) (starting prize) is determined by the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 33. 1 Judgment is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the starting port 44. If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44) (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202 and payout control is performed. A prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the device 70. Then, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the center side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44 to the management control device on the game hall side. conduct. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the first start pending number RaN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S204, if the first start hold number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (S204: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44 are reserved as a total of the two first starting ports. To.

On the other hand, in step S204, if the first start hold number RaN is less than the upper limit value (S204: YES), the process proceeds to step S205, and 1 is added to the first start hold number RaN in the corresponding hold area. Then, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S206, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step. In S205, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added. After executing step S206, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S207, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the information before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step S207, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) and the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize the determination result by the determination process before the hold information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of the normal process described later.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side), the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command. , A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S209. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S209 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S211. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step S211th, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process. If it is determined in step S212 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (step S212: NO), the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S212 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (step S212: YES), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

In step S213, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second symbol changes. It is a flag that is turned off when stopping.

If it is determined in step S213 that the second changing flag is not ON (step S213: NO), the process proceeds to step S214. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S213 that the second changing flag is ON (step S213: YES), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step S214, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing step S214, the process proceeds to step S215.

In step S215, the second start port entry flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second starting port entry flag is turned on when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, and is turned off when the second symbol starts to fluctuate when the second starting opening 34 enters the ball. To be. After executing step S215, the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S207) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the jackpot lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of reach are determined, and the pending information is the jackpot by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step S301, the game ball is stored in the storage area by entering the game ball into the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44) in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 15). Read the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. After that, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the entry of the game ball this time is executed as the game times is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the pre-judgment process executed by the entry of the game ball before the entry of the game ball this time is read from the corresponding storage area, and from the big hit lottery by the entry of the game ball this time. By grasping the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the entry of the game ball this time is executed as the game round is determined.

If it is determined in step S302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the entry of the game ball this time is executed as the game round, the process proceeds to (S302: YES), step S303. The hit / miss table for the first starting port (for the low probability mode) stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first start port, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. ..

On the other hand, in step S302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the entry of the game ball this time is executed as the game round (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304. As a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the first start port (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first start port, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306 and is stored by entering the game ball into the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the area is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read out this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311, and the game ball enters the starting port this time. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step S313 that the reach generation is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that the reach generation is not supported (S313: NO), the prior determination process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as the variable command, the type command, and the hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In the game round control process, a big hit lottery, a setting of a variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided in the right first starting port 44 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S408.

In step S408, the game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch the game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player. The details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (in the second and subsequent rounds, the start of the command output process of step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached.

If it is determined in step S409 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S409: NO), in steps S410 and S411 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S409 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S409: YES), the process returns to step S402 and each process from step S402 to step S408 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S402 to step S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control process>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S405) of the normal process.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S501: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step S502. That is, in the open / close execution mode, is the game ball entering the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) or the second starting port 34? Regardless of whether or not, the game round is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag is ON. In the first changing flag, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a changes when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). This is a flag that is turned on when starting the operation and turned off when the first symbol stops the fluctuation. If it is determined in step S502 that the first changing flag is not ON (S502: NO), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the first start port will be described later. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S502 that the first changing flag is ON (S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the first fluctuation stop process is executed. The details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second flag is turned on. This is a flag that is turned off when the symbol 2 stops changing. If it is determined in step S505 that the second changing flag is not ON (S505: NO), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S506, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the second changing flag is ON (S505: YES), the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, the second fluctuation stop process is executed. The details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S507, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port will be described. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S503) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the first start port. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the first start hold quantity RaN = 0. If it is determined in step S601 that the first start pending number RaN = 0 (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the number of reserved first starts RaN = 0 (S601: YES), the variation start process for the first start port is terminated.

In step S602, the hold information shift process is executed. In the hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later. After executing step S602, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, the determination process for the first starting port is executed. In the determination process for the first start port, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit / fail determination for determining the presence / absence of a jackpot or a small hit, and the jackpot type are sorted. Distribution judgment and reach judgment to judge the presence or absence of reach are performed. The details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S603, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the variable time setting process for the first starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first start port, the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the symbol, is set. The details of the variable time setting process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S604, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, the first variation command is set. The first variation command relates to special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44). It contains information indicating that it is a thing, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step S604. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, the first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the first type command includes information on the 16R probability variation jackpot, information on the 8R probability variation jackpot, information on the 8R normal jackpot, or information on the deviation.

The variable command and the first type command set in step S605 and step S606 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the fluctuation display on the first symbol display unit 37a is started, and then the process proceeds to step S608, and the first changing flag is turned ON. After executing step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, the value of the game count counter PCN is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PCN is set to a value in the game count counter PCN when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game count is executed. After executing step S609, the variation start processing for the first starting port is terminated.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S602) of the variable start process for the first start port.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step S701, the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S702.

In step S702, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S703, the pending information shift process is terminated.

<Judgment processing for the first starting port>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be described. The determination process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S603) of the variation start process for the first start port.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the first starting port. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned on when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start opening 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", and the second start The variation display of the second symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is reached. If it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is not ON (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. , It is usually turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the jackpot. If it is determined in step S802 that the mode is high probability mode (S802: YES), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 7 (b). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step S805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S802 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 7A. Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step S805.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S803 or step S804 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S805 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S806.

In step S806, the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The first hit flag is "big hit" as the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the first starting opening 33 on the center side or the first starting opening 44 on the right side). In this case, it is turned on, and the change display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first start port is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is reached. After executing step S806, the process proceeds to step S807.

In step S807, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 9A). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in. After executing step S807, the process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step S807 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the distributed jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S809, the probability variation jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is turned ON. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

In step S810, the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot, in the current game round, which is the probabilistic jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a is set to end (stop display) which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S810, the determination process of the first starting port is terminated.

In step S808, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (S808: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S811.

In step S811, the normal jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is turned ON. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, a stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a is set to end (stop display) the variable display with which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S812, the determination process of the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the result of the hit / fail determination in step S803 or step S804 is not a big hit (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. The reach is determined by referring to the determination table to determine whether or not reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach generation in the referenced reach determination table. The process of step S813 is executed when the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) in step S805 is not a big hit. That is, in step S813, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a game time in which reach occurs among the game times that are not big hits. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S813 is reach occurrence. If it is determined in step S814 that reach has occurred (S814: YES), the process proceeds to step S815, and the reach generation flags of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned on. After executing step S815, the process proceeds to step S816. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S814 that no reach has occurred (S814: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 without executing step S815.

In step S816, the stop symbol setting process for disconnection is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the game round of disengagement, the first symbol display unit 37a is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S816, the determination process for the first starting port is terminated.

Here, as described above, if it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816, and the stop symbol setting process for disconnection is executed. A stop display for disengagement is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. That is, before the game ball enters the second start port 34 first and the variation display of the second symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 stops, the first start port (center). When a game ball enters the side first start port 33 or the right side first start port 44), the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is "big hit". In the case of "small hit", the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side) is not executed. A stop display for disengagement is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. Further, the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is "big hit" or "small hit" by the fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 23) of the first starting opening, which will be described later. In this case, the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b shifts from the variable display to the stop display, and at the same time, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a shifts from the variable display to the stop display (FIG. 23 :). S1001, S1007 to S1010). Further, as described above, the first symbol and the second symbol do not start the variable display until the opening / closing execution mode is completed by the process of step S501 of the game round control process (FIG. 18).

As a result, from the time when the combination of symbols for operating the variable winning device 36 is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the time when the operation of the variable winning device 36 is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a Will stop at a symbol that does not activate the variable winning device 36, and will continue to display as it is.

<Fluctuating time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the variable time setting process for the first starting port will be described. The variable time setting process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S604) for the variable starting process for the first starting port.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for the first starting port. In step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S903, the process proceeds to step S907, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port is completed.

If it is determined in step S902 that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S904, and the result of the reach determination related to the current game round is the reach occurrence. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag is ON, and if it is determined that the reach generation flag is ON (S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S905, the process proceeds to step S907, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port is completed.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the reach determination related to the current game round is not reach occurrence (S904: NO), the process proceeds to step S906, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is generated. With reference to the fluctuation time table for this time, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S906, the process proceeds to step S907, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port is completed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the variation time table for non-reach generation is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be configured so as not to depend on the number of the first start hold number RaN, and the fluctuation time is set to be shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN is smaller. You may.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of losing reach may be different. good. Further, the variable time table for the probabilistic jackpot and the variable time table for the normal jackpot may be set individually.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S504) of the game round control process.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned on when the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start opening 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", and the second start The variation display of the second symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is reached. If it is determined in step S1001 that the second hit flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 22) has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1002 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1002 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended (S1002: NO), the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

In step S1003, the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step S801, step S812, or step S816 of the determination process (FIG. 21) for the first starting port. After executing step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. As described above, the first changing flag is the first symbol display unit 37a of the first symbol display unit 37a triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol 1 starts to fluctuate and is turned off when the first symbol stops the fluctuation. After executing step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second flag is turned on. This is a flag that is turned off when the symbol 2 stops changing. If it is determined in step S1005 that the second changing flag is not ON (S1005: NO), the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, the first hit flag is turned off. After that, the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the second fluctuation flag is ON (S1005: YES), the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the second hit flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process for the second start port (FIG. 26), which will be described later, has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1007 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1007 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S1007: YES), the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1009, the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step S801, step S812, or step S816 of the determination process (FIG. 21) for the first starting port. After executing step S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010.

In step S1010, the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port will be described. The variation start process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S506) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the second start port. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second start port entry flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S1101 that the second start port entry flag is ON (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the second start port entry flag is not ON (S1101: NO), the fluctuation start process for the second start port is terminated.

In step S1102, the second starting port entry flag is turned off. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, the determination process for the second starting port is executed. In the determination process for the second start port, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit / fail determination for determining the presence / absence of a jackpot or a small hit, and the jackpot type are sorted. Distribution judgment and reach judgment to judge the presence or absence of reach are performed. The details of the determination process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, the variable time setting process for the second starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port, the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the symbol, is set. The details of the variable time setting process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the reach. Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step S1104 are included. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

In step S1106, a type command is set. The type command includes information on whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit, and information on the type of big hit. Specifically, the type command includes 2R normal jackpot information, small hit information, or missed information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S1105 and step S1106 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the skip command setting process is executed. The details of the skip command setting process will be described later. After executing step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, the variation display on the second symbol display unit 37b is started. In the determination process for the second starting port in step S1103, which will be described in detail later, the reach occurrence flag is ON when it is determined that reach has occurred, but in that case, the reach occurrence flag is turned OFF. do. After executing step S1108, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1110, the counter value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After that, the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port is completed.

<Judgment processing for the second starting port>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 24: S1103) for the variable start process for the second start port.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the second starting port. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S1201 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. , It is usually turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the jackpot. If it is determined in step S1202 that the mode is high probability mode (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 8 (b). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step S1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1202 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 8A. Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step S1205.

In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1203 or step S1204 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S1205 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit (S1205: YES), the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1206, the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 9B). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in. In the present embodiment, the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second starting port. After executing step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208. In the present embodiment, only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second starting port. Therefore, the processes of steps S1208 to S1210 described below are performed in the present embodiment. Not executed.

In step S1208, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step S1207 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S1208 that the distributed jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1209, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is turned ON. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second starting port, so that this process is not executed. After executing step S1209, the process proceeds to step S1210.

In step S1210, the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot, in the current game round, which is the probabilistic jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b is set to end (stop display) which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1210, the determination process of the second starting port is terminated.

In step S1208, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (S1208: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1211.

In step S1211, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second starting port, so the jackpot type flag corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot is turned ON. After executing step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212.

In step S1212, a stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, in this game round, which is a normal jackpot, a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display is performed. Run. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1212, the determination process of the second starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1205 that the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1203 or step S1204 is not a big hit (S1205: NO), the process proceeds to step S1311 to determine whether the result of the hit / fail determination is a small hit. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the small hit. If it is determined in step S1213 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a small hit (S1213: YES), the process proceeds to step S1214.

In step S1214, the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S1215, and the small hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step S1215, the process proceeds to step S1216.

In step S1216, the stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, in the current game round, which is a small hit, a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display is performed. Run. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1216, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the first hit flag is ON (S1201: YES), or if it is determined in step S1213 that the result of the hit / fail determination is not a small hit (S1213: NO), it is for removal. Stop symbol setting processing is executed. The stop symbol setting process for disengagement is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display in the current game round of disengagement. do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1217, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

In the determination process for the second start port, unlike the determination process for the first start port (FIGS. 21: S813 to S815) described with reference to FIG. 21, the process of generating reach using the reach random number counter C3 is performed. Do not execute. In the present embodiment, the main purpose of the variable display of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is to stop the variable display of the first symbol. Therefore, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to intentionally insert the game ball into the second starting port 34, the timing as close as possible to the timing at which the game ball launch button 26 is operated is the first. It is desirable that the symbol 2 shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, it is not desirable to perform a reach effect that requires a relatively long time as an effect to be performed while the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the reach effect from being executed when the variation display of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed, the second starting port is used. In the determination process for the purpose, the process of generating the reach by the reach random number counter C3 is not executed.

<Fluctuating time setting process for the second starting port>
Next, the variable time setting process for the second starting port will be described. The variable time setting process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 24: S1104) for the variable starting process for the second starting port.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process for the second starting port. In step S1301, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for the second starting port stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for the second start port referred to in the fluctuation time setting process for the second start port is all 1 second. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main purpose of the variable display of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is to stop the variable display of the first symbol. There is. Therefore, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to intentionally insert the game ball into the second starting port 34, the timing as close as possible to the timing at which the game ball launch button 26 is operated is the first. It is desirable that the symbol 2 shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, the fluctuation time table for the second starting port is set so that the fluctuation time of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is 1 second, which is a relatively short time. There is. After executing step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port is completed.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be described. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S507) of the game round control process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first hit flag is "big hit" as the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the first starting opening 33 on the center side or the first starting opening 44 on the right side). In this case, it is turned on, and the variation display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is reached. If it is determined in step S1401 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process for the second starting port (FIG. 26) has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1402 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S1402: YES), the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1402 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (S1402: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

In step S1403, the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. That is, the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step S1210, step S1212, step S1216, or step S1217 of the determination process (FIG. 25) for the second starting port. After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. As described above, the second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second flag is turned on. This is a flag that is turned off when the symbol 2 stops changing. After executing step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first changing flag is the first symbol display unit 37a of the first symbol display unit 37a triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (center side first starting port 33 or right side first starting port 44). It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol 1 starts to fluctuate and is turned off when the first symbol stops the fluctuation. If it is determined in step S1405 that the first changing flag is not ON (S1405: NO), the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the second hit flag is turned off. After that, the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1405 that the first fluctuation flag is ON (S1405: YES), the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the first hit flag is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 22) has elapsed. If it is determined in step S1407 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended (S1407: NO), the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1407 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S1407: YES), the process proceeds to step S1408.

In step S1408, the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step S1408, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1409, the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step S1210, step S1212, step S1216, or step S1217 of the determination process (FIG. 25) for the second starting port. After executing step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

<Skip command setting process>
Next, the setting process of the skip command will be described. The setting process of the skip command is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 24: S1107) of the variation start process for the second start port.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the skip command. The setting process of the skip command is a process of determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned skip effect (see FIG. 11A) and non-skipable effect (see FIG. 13A).

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is 1 second or more. If it is determined in step S1501 that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is not 1 second or more (S1501: NO), the setting process of this skip command is terminated as it is. As described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 12, the skip effect and the non-skip effect are performed using the variation time of the second symbol. As described above, since the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set to 1 second, it takes 1 second to execute the skip effect or the non-skip effect. Therefore, when the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is less than 1 second, neither the skip effect nor the non-skip effect is executed. When the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is less than 1 second, the effect set for the fluctuation display of the first symbol is executed as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a is 1 second or more (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1502 and the first hit flag is ON. Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step S1502 that the first hit flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, the first non-skippable command is set. The first non-skippable command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the non-skippable effect is executed, and is a command output process of normal processing. (FIG. 17: Step S402), the signal is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S1503, the setting process of this skip command ends.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1504 that the second hit flag is ON (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, a skip execution command is set. The skip execution command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the skip effect is executed, and is a command output process of normal processing (FIG. 17). : It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S402). After executing step S1505, the setting process of this skip command ends.

If it is determined in step S1504 that the second hit flag is not ON (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, the second non-skippable command is set. The second non-skippable command is a command including information for making the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, recognize that the non-skippable effect is executed, and is a command output process of normal processing. (FIG. 17: Step S402), the signal is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S1506, the setting process of this skip command is terminated.

Here, the difference between the first non-skippable command set in step S1503 and the second non-skippable command set in step S1506 will be described.

The first non-skippable command is set in the following cases. After the first symbol starts to change and display when the game ball enters the center side first start port 33 (or the right side first start port 44), the game ball enters the second start port 34. When the second symbol starts to change and display as a trigger, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is "big hit". At the timing when the fluctuation display of the second symbol shifts to the stop display, the fluctuation display of the first symbol does not shift to the stop display, but is set in the fluctuation time setting process for the first starting port (FIG. 22). A stop display is displayed when the fluctuation time has elapsed. In this case, the first non-skippable command is set and the skip effect is not executed.

The second non-skippable command is set in the following cases. After the first symbol starts to change and display when the game ball enters the center side first start port 33 (or the right side first start port 44), the game ball enters the second start port 34. When the second symbol starts to change and display as a trigger, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by entering the second starting port is "missing" (not "big hit"). , If it is not a "small hit"), the change of the first symbol changes at the timing when the change display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 shifts to the stop display. The display does not shift to the stop display. In this case, the second non-skippable command is set and the skip effect is not executed. However, in this case, if the variation display of the second symbol is executed a plurality of times while the variation display of the first symbol is performed, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port is an opportunity. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "missing", the fluctuation display of the first symbol does not shift to the stop display, and the second non-skippable command is set at that timing and the non-skippable effect is executed. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port executed next is "big hit" or "small hit", the skip execution command is set (S1505). , The skip effect is executed at the timing when the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is started, and at the timing when the second symbol shifts to the stop display. As the skip effect ends, the variable display of the first symbol shifts to the stop display.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S406) of the normal process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the start of the ending period in the open / close execution mode and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is turned on at the start of the open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the open / close processing period.

If it is determined in step S1602 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1603: NO), the process proceeds to step S1604, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step S1604 that it is not the timing when the variation display is finished (S1604: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1604 that it is the timing when the variation display is finished (S1604: YES), the process proceeds to step S1605, and the result of the jackpot lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, the 2R normal jackpot flag, and the small hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1605: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the result of the jackpot lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 and the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. do. Then, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1607, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) or "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. The details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1608, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This opening command contains information about the set opening time. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed. After executing step S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the opening period flag is ON (S1603: YES), the process proceeds to step S1610.

In step S1610, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area To is "0". If it is determined in step S1610 that the opening period has ended (S1610: YES), the process proceeds to step S1611 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1612.

In step S1612, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S1612, the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1613, the number of rounds of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) and small hit flags stored in the RAM 64 are checked, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flags is confirmed. Is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. The details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614.

In step S1614, an open / close processing command is set. The set open / close processing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 17). This open / close processing command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open / close processing period. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received open / close processing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1614, the process proceeds to step S1615.

In step S1615, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1602 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1616 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. Specifically, when the large winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set to the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the large winning is won. Open the mouth 36a. Further, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a, or the opening limit number of game balls has been entered. The drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the large winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S1616, the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1617: NO), the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1617: YES), the process proceeds to step S1618 and the open / close processing period flag is turned off. After executing step S1618, the process proceeds to step S1619.

In step S1619, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1619, the process proceeds to step S1620.

In step S1620, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) or "0" (that is, 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1620, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1621, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This ending command contains information on the set ending time. Based on the received ending command, the voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing processing period, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and executes the effect of the determined content. Control various devices. After executing step S1621, the process proceeds to step S1622.

In step S1622, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the ending period flag is ON (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1623.

In step S1623, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S1620) is "0". If it is determined in step S1623 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is "0" (S1623: YES), the process proceeds to step S1624.

In step S1624, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S1625, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S1626 to execute the transition process at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1626, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1623 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not "0" (S1623: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1607) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening / closing execution is executed. It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the mode is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a big hit (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1701 that the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S1701: YES), that is, when the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, or If it is determined in step S1702 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot (S1702: YES), the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1704, "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, in the case where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry is 2R. If it is a big hit or a small hit, the opening effect is not actually performed. After executing step S1704, the opening time setting process is terminated.

<Round number setting process>
Next, the round number setting process will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1613) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the round number setting process. In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening / closing execution is executed. It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the mode is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a big hit (S1801: YES), the process proceeds to step S1802, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. .. After that, the process of setting the number of rounds is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is not the 16R probability variation jackpot (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is It is determined whether or not it is an 8R probability variable jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 8R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S1804 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is an 8R probability variation jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot (S1804: YES), the process proceeds to step S1805, and the first round counter area RC1 is set to "8". "Is set. After that, the process of setting the number of rounds is completed.

On the other hand, in step S1804, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is not the 8R probability variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot (S1804: NO), that is, the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is 2R. If it is a normal big hit, the process proceeds to step S1806, and "2" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After that, the process of setting the number of rounds is completed.

In step S1801, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S1801: YES), that is, the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed with the entry is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1807 and "1" is set in the first round counter area RC1. To set. After that, the process of setting the number of rounds is completed.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: 1616) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1901 that the large winning opening 36a is not open (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". .. If it is determined in step S1902 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1902: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903.

In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the large winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1903: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step S1904, and the variable winning drive unit is used to open the large winning opening 36a. The drive state is 36c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, the ball entry counter setting process is executed. In the ball entry counter setting process, a value that allows a game ball to enter during one opening (during one round) of the large winning opening 36a is set in the ball entry counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. set. The details of the ball entry counter setting process will be described later. After executing step S1905, the process proceeds to step S1906.

In step S1906, the opening limit time setting process is executed. In the opening limit time setting process, the opening limit time, which is the limit of one opening time of the large winning opening 36a, is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the opening limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the large winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. The details of the opening limit time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1907, the release command is set. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The release command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has started, and is a command of normal processing. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402). The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening of. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a indicates the effect content of the liquid crystal display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what was started.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the large winning opening 36a is open (step S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1908, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1908 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1908: NO), the process proceeds to step S1909.

In step S1909, whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1909 that no game ball has been entered (S1909: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that a game ball has been entered (S1909: YES), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the value of the entry counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1911.

In step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S1911 that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is not "0" (S1911: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step S1908 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1908: YES), or when it is determined in step S1911 that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is "0". (S1911: YES), the process proceeds to step S1912, and the large winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S1913.

In step S1913, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1914, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1914 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1914: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1914 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1915.

In step S1915, the closing time setting process is executed. The closing time setting process is a process for setting the closing time of the large winning opening 36a, and specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the large winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, "1000" (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1916.

In step S1916, a close command is set. After that, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening is completed. The closing command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed, and is a command for normal processing. In the output process (FIG. 17: step S402), the sound is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and at the same time, the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a of the liquid crystal display device 41 has been completed. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Incoming ball counter setting process>
Next, the ball entry counter setting process will be described. The ball entry counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 31: S1905) of the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ball entry counter setting process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening / closing execution is executed. It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the mode is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S2001 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a big hit (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a 2R normal jackpot (S2002: NO), the process proceeds to step S2003, and "10" is set in the ball entry counter area PC. After that, the main ball counter setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S2001 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S2001: NO), or in step S2002, the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. If it is determined (S2002: YES), the process proceeds to step S2004, and "6" is set in the ball entry counter area PC. That is, when the current entry counter setting process is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is 2R normal. If it is a big hit or a small hit, set "6" in the ball entry counter area PC. After that, the main ball counter setting process is terminated.

<Opening limit time setting process>
Next, the opening limit time setting process and the setting process will be described. The opening limit time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S1906) of the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening limit time setting process. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening / closing execution is executed. It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the mode is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a big hit (S2101: YES), the process proceeds to step S2102, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a 2R normal jackpot (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2103, and the first timer counter area T1 is set to "15000" (that is, that is). 30.0 sec) is set. After that, the main opening limit time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S2101, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S2101: NO), or in step S2102, the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. If it is determined to be (S2102: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104, and "100" (0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. That is, when the opening limit time setting process this time is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is 2R normal. If it is a big hit or a small hit, "100" (0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After that, the main opening limit time setting process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1620) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening / closing execution is executed. It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the mode is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S2201 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step S2202 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a 2R normal jackpot (S2202: NO), the process proceeds to step S2203, and the timer counter area Te is set to "3000" (that is, 6. 0 sec) is set. After that, the ending time setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S2201 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S2201: NO), or in step S2202, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot. If so (S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2204, and "0" (0.0sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. That is, when the ending time setting process this time is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is a 2R normal jackpot. , Or, if it is a small hit, set "0" (0.0sec) in the timer counter area Te. After that, the ending time setting process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1626) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R normal jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening / closing execution is executed. It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the mode is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2302, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a probable big hit. Judge whether or not. Specifically, when either the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the probability variation jackpot.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a probable change jackpot (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2302 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a probable change jackpot (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2303, the corresponding probability change jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, among the 16R probability change jackpot flag and the 8R probability change flag, a process of turning off the ON flag is executed. After executing step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304.

In step S2304, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305.

In step S2305, the high probability mode command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The high-probability mode command is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a probable change jackpot (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, the process of turning off the ON flag among the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 2R normal jackpot flag is executed. After executing step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2308.

In step S2308, the high probability mode flag is turned off. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. After executing step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309.

In step S2309, the low probability mode command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step S2309, the process proceeds to step S2310.

In step S2310, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S2311, and 100 is set as the counter value in the game count counter PNC. After executing step S2311, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

In step S2301, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S2301: NO), that is, when the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, the step. Proceed to S2312 and turn off the small hit flag. After executing step S2312, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S407) of the normal process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S2401 that the supporting flag is not ON (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step S2402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S2402: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403.

In step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2403: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S2403: YES), the process proceeds to step S2404.

In step S2404, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S2404 that it is the end timing of the variation display (S2404: YES), the process proceeds to step S2405, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2404 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (S2404: NO), the process proceeds to step S2406.

In step S2406, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S2406 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S2406: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2406 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S2406: YES), the process proceeds to step S2407.

In step S2407, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S2408 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step S2407 (S2407: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step S2408 (S2408: YES), the process proceeds to step S2409 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S2410.

In step S2410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S2409 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S2410 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S2410: YES), the process proceeds to step S2411, the support winning flag is turned on, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S2412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2410 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support winning (S2410: NO), the process proceeds to step S2412 without executing the process of step S2411.

In step S2412, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S2412 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S2412: YES), the process proceeds to step S2413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S2412: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S2413, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is “0”. The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S2413 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S2413: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2413 that the game count counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S2414 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S2415.

In step S2415, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S2415 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the corresponding process.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the open / close execution mode is set (S2407: YES), or if it is determined in step S2408 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S2408: NO), the process proceeds to step S2416 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step S2417.

In step S2417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S2416 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S2417 that the support is not won (S2417: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2417 that the support is won (S2417: YES), the process proceeds to step S2418, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the support winning flag is ON (S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2419, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step S2419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2419: NO), the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S2419: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420.

In step S2420, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S2421 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2401 that the supporting flag is ON (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2422, and the electric function opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 44a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electric service opening / closing process>
Next, the electric function opening / closing process will be described. The electric service opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2422) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2502.

In step S2502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2502: NO), the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing process ends.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the closed state is performed. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "250" (that is, 0.5 sec). That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504.

In step S2504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S2505, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S2505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S2505: NO), the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S2505: YES), the process proceeds to step S2506 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step S2501 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2507, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S2507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2507: NO), the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S2507: YES), the process proceeds to step S2508, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S2509.

In step S2509, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2510 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S2510 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S2510: YES), the process proceeds to step S2511, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that the open / close execution mode is set (S2509: YES), or if it is determined in step S2510 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S2510: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

<Game ball launch control process>
Next, the game ball launch control process will be described. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S408) of the normal process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a game ball launch control process. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the operation handle 25. If it is determined in step S2601 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2601 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S2601: NO), the game ball launch control process is terminated.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the game ball launch button 26 is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the game ball launch button 26 is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is 0. If it is determined in step S2603 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S2603: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2603 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S2603: NO), the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the wait button 25b is ON. If it is determined in step S2604 that the wait button is ON (S2604: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2604 that the wait button is not ON (S2604: NO), the process proceeds to step S2605.

In step S2605, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a firing intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing step S2605, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the launch intensity for right-handed strike. In the present embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so that the game ball is launched with the same firing intensity as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a firing intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After that, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

A5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. An effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S2701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, a command correspondence process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process in step S2702. After executing step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704.

In step S2704, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command correspondence process in step S2702. After executing step S2704, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 41: S2702).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the command correspondence processing will be described.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2801 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2801: YES), the process proceeds to step S2402 to execute the hold command correspondence process. In the hold command correspondence process, the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (center side first start port 33 or right side first start port 44) based on the received hold command. While grasping the number and the determination result of the destination determination process, a command for controlling the display mode of the first reserved display area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2801: NO), the process proceeds to step S2803 without executing step S2802.

In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the first variation command and the first type command are received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2803 that the first variable command and the first type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804 and the first start port command correspondence process is executed. do. The details of the command correspondence process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2803 that the first variation command and the first type command have not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2803: NO), the process proceeds to step S2805 without executing step S2804.

In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the second variation command and the second type command are received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2805 that the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (S2805: YES), the process proceeds to step S2806 and the second start port command correspondence process is executed. do. The details of the command correspondence process for the second start port will be described later. After executing step S2806, the process proceeds to step S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2805 that the second variation command and the second type command have not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2805: NO), the process proceeds to step S2807 without executing step S2806.

In step S2807, it is determined whether or not a skip execution command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2807 that the skip execution command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2807: YES), the process proceeds to step S2808 to execute the skip execution command corresponding process. The details of the skip execution command support processing will be described later. After executing step S2808, the process proceeds to step S2809. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2807 that the skip execution command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2807: NO), the process proceeds to step S2809 without executing step S2808.

In step S2809, it is determined whether or not the first non-skippable command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2809 that the first non-skippable command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2809: YES), the process proceeds to step S2810 to execute the first non-skippable command correspondence process. The details of the first non-skippable command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S2810, the process proceeds to step S2811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2809 that the first non-skippable command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2809: NO), the process proceeds to step S2811 without executing step S2809.

In step S2811, it is determined whether or not the second non-skippable command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2811 that the second non-skippable command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the second non-skippable command corresponding process is executed. The details of the second non-skippable command correspondence process will be described later. After executing step S2812, the process proceeds to step S2813. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2811 that the second non-skippable command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2811: NO), the process proceeds to step S2813 without executing step S2812.

In step S2813, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2813 that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2813: YES), the process proceeds to step S2814 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot and the opening time included in the opening command received this time are specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot and the opening time is set, and the content of the effect is set. A command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S2814, the process proceeds to step S2815. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2813 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2813: NO), the process proceeds to step S2815 without executing step S2814.

In step S2815, it is determined whether or not an open / close processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2815 that the open / close processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2815: YES), the process proceeds to step S2816 to execute the round effect setting process. In the round effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed during the open / close processing period is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the open / close processing command, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The command is sent to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S2816, the process proceeds to step S2817. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2815 that the open / close processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2815: NO), the process proceeds to step S2817 without executing step S2816.

In step S2817, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2817 that the ending command has been received (S2817: YES), the process proceeds to step S2818 to execute the ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the ending effect in the ending period is set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time, and the command in which the information corresponding to the effect content is set is displayed. It is transmitted to the side MPU 102. After executing step S2818, the process proceeds to step S2819. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2817 that the ending command has not been received (S2817: NO), the process proceeds to step S2819 without executing step S2818.

In step S2819, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the high-probability mode command, the low-probability mode command, the open command, and the close command are set. Further, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S2819, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command correspondence process (FIG. 42: S2802).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. As described above, the hold command correspondence process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the processing corresponding to the pending command will be described.

In step S2901, the update process of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The first hold quantity counter area sets the number of hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) to the sound light side MPU 92. It is a counter area for specifying in. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. Hereinafter, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side) is also referred to as the “first hold number”. After executing step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902.

The reason why the process of step S2901 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side) is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the power supply is turned on. When the power is cut off, the main control device 60 stores and holds the hold information, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the number of hold information actually held and stored in the main control device 60 is adopted. And, there may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 does not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the included number of holds is set in the first hold number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step S2902, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 is based on the information of the first hold number included in the hold command and the judgment result of the prior determination process. A command for control is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S2902, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Command correspondence processing for the first start port>
Next, the command correspondence process for the first start port will be described. The command correspondence process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: S2804) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process for the first start port. As described above, the command correspondence process for the first start port is a process executed when it is determined that the first variable command and the first type command have been received, and the first start port (the first start on the center side). This is a process for setting the content of the effect executed at the time of the variable display of the first symbol executed when the game ball enters the mouth 33 or the right first starting port 44). Hereinafter, specific processing of the command correspondence processing for the first starting port will be described.

In step S3001, the first fluctuation command and the first type command received this time are read, and information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the jackpot type, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the two commands. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step S3002.

In step S3002, the effect type setting process is executed. In the effect type setting process, the contents of the advance notice effect and the reach effect in the game times are set based on the information read in step S3001. After executing step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, the liquid crystal display symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal display symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of symbols is established on the effective line L. The information corresponding to the result is set as the information of the liquid crystal display this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is out of order, it is determined from the content of the first variation command whether or not reach has occurred. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the design for the liquid crystal display this time. After executing step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3004.

In step S3004, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the game round this time is specified from the content of the first fluctuation command received this time, the information on the fluctuation time, and the information on the liquid crystal display specified in step S3003. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of. When selecting this variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S3004, the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3005, information on the effect type, the liquid crystal display symbol, and the variable display pattern set in this game time is set in the game time effect command for the first start port. After that, the process proceeds to step S3006, and the game rotation effect command for the first starting port is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received game rotation effect command for the first start port on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S3006, the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the pending information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, it is determined whether or not the variable command received this time is the first variable command, and if it is determined that the variable command received this time is the first variable command, a sound is produced. The information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the first reserved quantity stored in the first reserved quantity counter area of the optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step S3007, the command correspondence process for the first start port is terminated.

<Command response processing for the 2nd start port>
Next, the command correspondence process for the second start port will be described. The command correspondence process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: S2806) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process for the second start port. As described above, the second start port command correspondence process is a process executed when it is determined that the second variable command and the second type command have been received, and the game ball to the second start port 34 is executed. This is a process for setting the content of the effect to be executed when the variation of the second symbol, which is executed when the ball is entered, is displayed. Hereinafter, specific processing of the command corresponding processing for the second starting port will be described.

In step S3101, the second variation command and the second type command received this time are read, and information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the big hit type, the presence / absence of a small hit, and the fluctuation time is read from the two commands. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After that, the process proceeds to step S3102.

In step S3102, the liquid crystal display symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal display symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery for this game is a 2R normal jackpot, the liquid crystal display symbol (character) corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. The information corresponding to is set as the information of the design for the liquid crystal display this time. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery of this game is a small hit or a miss, the information corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol (character) corresponding to the small hit or the miss is in the second liquid crystal display area 41c. Is set as the information of the design for the liquid crystal display this time. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the game round this time is specified from the content of the second fluctuation command received this time, the information on the fluctuation time, and the information on the liquid crystal display specified in step S3102. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of. When selecting this variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104.

In step S3104, information on the effect type, the liquid crystal display symbol, and the variable display pattern set in this game time is set in the game time effect command for the second start port. After that, the process proceeds to step S3105, and the game rotation effect command for the second starting port is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received game rotation effect command for the second start port on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S3105, the command correspondence process for the second start port is terminated.

<Processing for skip execution command>
Next, the process corresponding to the skip execution command will be described. The skip execution command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: S2808) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the skip execution command corresponding process. In step S3201, a skip effect is set. Specifically, the skip effect described in FIG. 11A is set as the effect to be executed. After executing step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, the skip effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received skip effect command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S3202, the process corresponding to this skip execution command is terminated.

<Processing for the first non-skippable command>
Next, the process corresponding to the first non-skippable command will be described. The first non-skippable command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: S2810) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first non-skippable command correspondence process. In step S3301, the remaining time information of the fluctuation time of the first symbol in the fluctuation display is read out. As a specific example using FIG. 12, the time information corresponding to the period from the time Tm6 at which the variation display of the second symbol is started to the time Tm16 at which the variation display of the first symbol ends is read out. As an actual process, the remaining time information of the timer counter that counts the fluctuation time ct1 which is the fluctuation time of the first symbol is read out. After executing step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302.

In step S3302, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more. If it is determined in step S3302 that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more (S3302: YES), the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, the effect that cannot be skipped at the time of a big hit is set as an effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13A is set as the effect to be executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3304, and a non-skippable effect command at the time of a big hit is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received jackpot non-skippable effect command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S3303, the process corresponding to the first non-skippable command is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3302 that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is not 5 seconds or more (S3302: NO), the process proceeds to step S3305.

In step S3305, the jackpot notification effect is set as the effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13B is set as the effect to be executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, and the jackpot notification effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received jackpot notification effect command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S3306, the first non-skippable command correspondence process is terminated.

<Processing for the second non-skippable command>
Next, the second non-skippable command correspondence process will be described. The second non-skippable command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: S2812) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the second non-skippable command correspondence process. In step S3401, the effect that cannot be skipped at the time of disconnection is set as the effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13A is set as the effect to be executed. That is, the jackpot skip effect set in step S3304 (FIG. 47) and the off-skip non-skippable effect set in step S3401 are the same effects. By executing the same non-skippable effect at the time of a big hit and at the time of a miss, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. After executing step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402.

In step S3402, a non-skippable effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received non-skippable effect command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S3402, the second non-skippable command correspondence process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step S3501, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step S3502.

In step S3502, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S3601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the image is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step S3701, the command correspondence process is executed. In the command correspondence process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 50), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (S3701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the advance notice effect set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect such as the liquid crystal pattern, and display the effect image according to the mode on the liquid crystal display. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step S3702, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (S3701) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S3702). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3704, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S3703) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the liquid crystal display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S3705, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shortens the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time, so that the preset fluctuation time in the predetermined game times is shortened. If it is long, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the interruption of concentration on the game in a predetermined game time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time is performed by operating the game ball launch button 26 or rotating the operation handle 25. By inserting the game ball into the second starting port 34, the player can intentionally prompt the player, so that the player can execute a process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol at a desired timing. Can be urged. For example, when the player recognizes the effect being executed during the variable display of the first symbol, he / she feels that a big hit cannot be expected and wants to end the variable display of the first symbol intentionally. It is possible to prompt the execution of the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol, and to end the variation display of the first symbol earlier. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored due to interruption of concentration in each game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball launch button 26 is provided, the operation to be performed by the player in order to promote the execution of the process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. Can be facilitated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 34 is arranged at a position where the game ball enters when the operation handle 25 is rotated by the player so that the firing strength of the game ball becomes the maximum strength. Therefore, the player can enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by a simple operation of the operation handle 25. That is, the player can intentionally put the game ball into the second starting port 34 by the easy rotation operation of the operation handle 25, and as a result, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is set in advance. The player can intentionally encourage the player to execute a process that shortens the time to a shorter time than the fluctuation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variable display, the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and displayed and the combination of the second symbol to be stopped and displayed are based on the combination. , It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. Therefore, for example, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 while the first symbol is fluctuating, the first symbol is displayed together with the stop display. By recognizing whether or not the symbol of the above is stopped and displayed, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and playability that are different from the conventional ones.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the hit / miss table for the second starting port has a probability of being a big hit or a small hit in both the hit / miss table for low probability and the hit / miss table for high probability. , Higher than the probability of being off. That is, when the second symbol starts the variable display after the first symbol starts the variable display, the process of shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a shorter time than the preset variable time is executed. The probability that the second symbol will be stopped and displayed in the combination is higher than the probability that the second symbol will be stopped and displayed in the combination in which the process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a shorter time than the preset fluctuation time is not executed. expensive. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time with high probability.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a so-called hold function for holding the entry of the game ball when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 during the period when the second symbol is variablely displayed. Do not. Therefore, it is easy for the player to control the timing at which the variation display of the second symbol is started. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to control the timing of executing the process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is 1 second in the case of a "small hit" in the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. , The expected value of the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the expected value of the fluctuation time of the first symbol. Therefore, even if the second symbol starts the variable display after the first symbol starts the variable display, the process of shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a shorter time than the preset variable time. Can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 34 is arranged upstream from the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side) in the direction in which the game ball flows down. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side) but not to enter the second starting port 34. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally executing a process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time, the stop display suggesting that the first symbol to be variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. Since the skip effect is executed as the effect, the player can recognize that the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a shorter time than the preset variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time in the case where the second symbol starts the variation display after the first symbol starts the variation display. If the time is not shortened, the non-skippable effect is executed, so that the player can be made aware that the fluctuation time of the first symbol is not shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time in the case where the second symbol starts the variation display after the first symbol starts the variation display. If the time is not shortened, the effect to be executed is selected according to the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol. Specifically, as described in step S3302, when the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more, the jackpot non-skippable effect is executed, and the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is left. If the time is less than 5 seconds, the jackpot notification effect is executed, so that the effect according to the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed can be executed, the game can be given intonation, and the player can play the game. Can give a sense of anticipation and urgency.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, the second embodiment will be described. The difference between the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol is variablely displayed. However, when the second symbol is variablely displayed, the variable display of the first symbol is not started. Other points are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

FIG. 52 is a time chart illustrating an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In this example, a case where the game ball enters the second starting port 34 before the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the central side will be described.

When the player starts the operation of the operation handle 25 at the time Tm1, the game ball is launched into the game area PA by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In this example, the player adjusts the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 on the central side.

After that, the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at time Tm2 prior to the entry of the game ball into the central first starting port 33 by the launch of the game ball by the operation of the operation handle 25. By operating the game ball launch button 26 on the player, the game ball enters the second start port 34, and the detection sensor for the second start port detects the entry of the game ball at time Tm3. After that, the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the center side, and at time Tm4, the detection sensor for the first starting port detects the entry of the game ball.

Due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b variablely displays the second symbol between the time Tm5 and the time Tm6, that is, during the fluctuation time ct1. The second symbol is stopped and displayed. It is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port this time is "small hit".

At this time, at time Tm4, the second symbol is displayed even though the detection sensor for the first starting port detects the entry of the game ball by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side. During the fluctuation time ct1 in which the first symbol is displaying the fluctuation, the first symbol display unit 37a does not start the fluctuation display of the first symbol, and the fluctuation display is displayed from the time Tm7 after the second symbol is stopped and displayed. Start. In this example, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port is "missing". Therefore, at the same time that the variation display of the first symbol is started, the pachinko machine 10 starts the effect for the first symbol for disengagement.

It is a condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on when the player who recognizes that the variation display of the first symbol and the effect for the first symbol for disengagement have started operates the game ball launch button 26 at the time Tm8. As a result, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 into the game area PA. When the game ball launched into the game area PA by the player operating the game ball launch button 26 at the time Tm8 enters the second start port 34, the detection sensor for the second start port is used for the game at the time Tm9. Detects the entry of a ball. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at the time Tm10, the second symbol display unit 37b is the second symbol. Starts the variable display of.

The second symbol display unit 37b variablely displays the second symbol during the period from the time Tm10 to the time Tm11, that is, during the fluctuation time ct4 (1 second in the present embodiment), and then displays the second symbol. Stop display.

At this time, as in the first embodiment, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a, which has been variable-displayed, has the first symbol, even though the initially set variable time ct2 has not elapsed. 2. At the timing (time Tm11) when the second symbol of the symbol display unit 37b displays the stop, the first symbol shifts from the variable display to the stop display. As a result, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b display a stop display at almost the same time. Then, at the time Tm12, the variable winning device is opened once when the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the details of the specific processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the specific processing, the difference from the first embodiment is the content of the processing in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 19) for the first starting port, and the other specific processing is the first embodiment. Is the same as. Therefore, in this description, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port will be described, and the description of other specific processing will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the first start port in the second embodiment. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S503) of the game turn control process.

The difference between the variation start processing for the first starting port in the second embodiment and the variation start processing for the first starting port in the first embodiment is the variation start processing for the first starting port in the second embodiment. Is a point in which it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the second changing flag is ON. The other processing contents are the same as the processing contents of the variation start processing for the first starting port in the first embodiment.

In the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port in the second embodiment, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the second changing flag is ON, and if it is determined that the second changing flag is not ON, it is determined. (S3802: NO) The process proceeds to step S3803, and if it is determined that the second changing flag is ON (S3802: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is terminated. That is, when it is determined that the second changing flag is ON, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is performed without executing the processing for starting the fluctuation of the first symbol (steps S3803 to S3810). finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first symbol is variablely displayed by determining whether or not the second changing flag is ON in step S3802 of the variable starting process for the first starting port. In this case, even though the variable display of the second symbol is started, the process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is variablely displayed is realized.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol is variablely displayed and the second symbol is variablely displayed even though the second symbol is variablely displayed. Since the variation display of the first symbol is not started, the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side), but the game ball enters the first starting port. It is possible to avoid an event in which a big hit lottery is not performed when a game ball enters. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. This will be described in detail below.

In the first embodiment and the present embodiment, as can be seen from the process of step S801 of the determination process for the first start port (FIG. 21), the first start port after the game ball enters the second start port 34. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", the second hit. Since the flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816, and the stop symbol setting process for disconnection is executed. Therefore, even though the game ball has entered the first starting port, the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is not executed.

That is, in the first embodiment, when the first symbol starts the variable display when the second symbol is displaying the variable display, the second symbol serves as an opportunity to start the variable display. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the entry into the starting port 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", even if the first symbol starts the variable display during the variable display of the second symbol. , The jackpot lottery based on the entry into the first starting port, which triggered the start of the variable display of the first symbol, is not executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the second symbol is variablely displayed, the variable display of the first symbol is not started, so that the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 33) is not started. It is possible to avoid the event that the big hit lottery is not performed when the ball enters the first starting port even though the game ball has entered in 44), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

C. Third embodiment:
Next, the third embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when the first symbol is variablely displayed and the second symbol is variablely displayed, the first symbol is variablely displayed even though the variable display of the second symbol is started. Although the process of not starting the variable display of the symbol has been realized, in the third embodiment, the second symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b in the case where the second symbol is variablely displayed. Only when the combination corresponds to the "big hit" or the "small hit" in the big hit lottery, the process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol is realized. By doing so, even though the game ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side), the game ball has entered the first start port. It has the same effect as the second embodiment, such as avoiding the event that the big hit lottery is not performed, and the variation display of the first symbol is started more frequently than the second embodiment. can do.

Hereinafter, the details of the specific processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the specific processing, the difference from the second embodiment is the content of the processing in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 53) for the first starting port, and the other specific processing is the first embodiment. And the same as the second embodiment. Therefore, in this description, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port will be described, and the description of other specific processing will be omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the first start port in the third embodiment. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S503) of the game turn control process.

The difference between the variation start processing for the first starting port in the third embodiment and the variation start processing for the first starting port in the second embodiment is the variation start processing for the first starting port in the third embodiment. Is a point in which it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the second hit flag is ON. The other processing contents are the same as the processing contents of the variation start processing for the first starting port in the second embodiment.

In the third embodiment, in step S3902, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON, as in the second embodiment. Then, if it is determined that the second changing flag is not ON (S3902: NO), the process proceeds to step S3904.

If it is determined in step S3902 that the second changing flag is ON (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903, and it is determined whether or not the second hit flag is ON. Then, if it is determined that the second hit flag is not ON (S3903: NO), the process proceeds to step S3904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3903 that the second hit flag is ON (S3903: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second variation flag is ON in step S3902 of the variation start process for the first start port, and step S3903 of the variation start process for the first start port. In the case where the second symbol is variablely displayed by determining whether or not the second hit flag is ON, the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is , Only when the combination corresponds to the "big hit" or the "small hit" in the big hit lottery, the process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol is realized.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the second symbol is variablely displayed, the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is the "big hit" in the jackpot lottery. Only when the combination corresponds to "" or "small hit", the variation display of the first symbol is not started, so that the game ball is set to the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44). The second embodiment has the same effect as the second embodiment, such as avoiding an event in which a big hit lottery is not performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening even though the ball has entered. As compared with the embodiment, the variable display of the first symbol can be started with a higher frequency.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment includes a configuration for detecting an abnormality or fraud. Specifically, it was fired from the game ball launch mechanism 81 when the player operated the operation handle 25 so as to maximize the rotation operation amount, or when the game ball launch button 26 was operated. It is determined whether or not the game ball has normally entered the second starting port 34.

In the present embodiment, on condition that the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the operation handle 25 is operated by the player so as to maximize the rotation operation amount, or the game ball launch button 26. Is operated, it is determined whether or not the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 has entered the second starting port 34 within 2 seconds.

Then, when the player operates the operation handle 25 so as to maximize the rotation operation amount, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is released. When an event in which the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 occurs five times in a row within 2 seconds, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred even when the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state even though the game ball has entered the second starting port 34.

By making such a determination, an abnormality such as a foreign substance existing in the path through which the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 to the non-electric accessory 34a passes and the game ball not normally circulated, or an operation handle by the player An abnormality such as an abnormality in which the launch control device 80 does not normally control the launch intensity even though the rotation operation amount of the 25 is operated to the maximum or the game ball launch button 26 is operated. Even though the game ball has entered the second starting port 34, the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state and the player is in an unfairly advantageous state, or the player does not perform any operation. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as the closure of the accessory 34a being hindered.

Hereinafter, the details of the specific processing for detecting the above abnormality or fraud will be described. In this description, only the processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the processing that is the same as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a normal process (main control) executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The difference between the normal process in the present embodiment and the normal process (FIG. 17) in the first embodiment is the processing content of the game ball launch control process (S4008) executed as a subroutine and the new abnormality detection process. It was added. Other processing contents in the normal processing are the same as those in the first embodiment. As described above, the abnormality detection process in step S4009 is a process for detecting an abnormality or fraud in the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the game ball launch control process according to the fourth embodiment. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S4008) of the normal process. The difference between the game ball launch control process in the present embodiment and the game ball launch control process in the first embodiment is that the process of step S4106 and the process of step S4108 are newly added in this embodiment. That is. Hereinafter, the game ball launch control process in the present embodiment will be described in order from the beginning of the process.

If it is determined in step S4101 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S4101: YES), the process proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S4101: NO), the game ball launch control process is terminated.

In step S4102, it is determined whether or not the game ball launch button 26 is ON. If it is determined in step S4102 that the game ball launch button 26 is not ON (S4102: NO), the process proceeds to step S4103.

In step S4103, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is 0. If it is determined in step S4103 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S4103: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S4103 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S4103: NO), the process proceeds to step S4104.

In step S4104, it is determined whether or not the wait button 25b is ON. If it is determined in step S4104 that the wait button is ON (S4104: YES), the game ball launch control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the wait button is not ON (S4104: NO), the process proceeds to step S4105.

In step S4105, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a firing intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing step S4105, the process proceeds to step S4106.

In step S4106, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. If it is determined in step S4106 that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is not the maximum (S4106: NO), the game ball launch control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S4106 that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is the maximum (S4106: YES), the process proceeds to step S4108.

On the other hand, if it is determined in 4102 that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S4102: YES), the process proceeds to step S4107. In step S4107, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the launch intensity for right-handed strike. In the present embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so that the game ball is launched with the same firing intensity as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a firing intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After that, the game ball launch control process is terminated. After executing step S4107, the process proceeds to step S4108.

In step S4108, the maximum firing intensity flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The maximum firing intensity flag is a flag that is turned ON when a control signal is transmitted so as to launch the game ball at the maximum firing intensity. After executing step S4108, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

Next, the abnormality detection process (main control) will be described.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an abnormality detection process. The abnormality detection process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S4009) of the normal process. Further, as described above, the abnormality detection process is a process newly added in the fourth embodiment.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 has performed a reset operation for resetting the abnormality detection. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reset button for resetting the abnormality detection has been operated by the administrator. If it is determined in step S4201 that the reset operation has not been performed (S4201: NO), the process proceeds to step S4202.

In step S4202, it is determined whether or not the abnormality detection start flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The abnormality detection start flag is a flag that is turned on when the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is placed in the second start port 34. It is used to determine whether or not the ball will enter within a predetermined time. If it is determined in step S4202 that the abnormality detection start flag is not ON (S4202: NO), the process proceeds to step S4203.

In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state. Specifically, the open-closed detection sensor provided on the non-electric accessory 34a detects the open state or the closed state of the non-electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S4203 that the non-electric accessory 34a is not in the open state (S4203: NO), the abnormality detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4203 that the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204.

In step S4204, it is determined whether or not the maximum firing intensity flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S4204 that the maximum firing intensity flag is not ON (S4204: NO), this abnormality detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4204 that the maximum firing intensity flag is ON (S4204: YES), the process proceeds to step S4205.

In step S4205, it is detected whether or not the game ball has been launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a launch rail for supplying the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Further, a launch ball detection sensor for detecting a game ball is provided on the launch rail. The launch ball detection sensor consists of an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and detects a launch ball in a situation where the game ball is held by a holding member that holds the game ball immediately before launch in the game ball launch mechanism 81. An HI level signal is output as a signal, and a LOW level signal is output as a launch ball detection signal in a situation where the game ball is not held by the holding member. Therefore, the launch ball detection sensor makes it possible to identify that the game ball has been supplied on the launch rail and that the supplied game ball has been launched. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method. If the launch of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is detected in step S4205 (S4205: YES), the process proceeds to step S4206.

In step S4206, the abnormality detection time setting process is executed. Specifically, 1000 (2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter Td. The abnormality detection time setting process is a process of determining a threshold value (Td) of the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity and to enter the second starting port 34. In the process described later, if the required time is equal to or longer than the threshold value, the value of the detection counter Cd described later is added by 1. In the present embodiment, 2 seconds is set as the threshold value (Td). That is, when the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity and to enter the second starting port 34 is 2 seconds or more, the value of the detection counter Cd is incremented by 1. After executing step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, the abnormality detection start flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step S4207, this abnormality detection process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4202 that the abnormality detection start flag is ON (S4202: YES), the process proceeds to step S4208. In step S4208, it is determined whether or not the timer counter Td is 0. If it is determined in step S4208 that the timer counter Td is not 0 (S4208: NO), the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34. If it is determined in step S4209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S4209: NO), this abnormality detection process ends. If it is determined in step S4209 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S4209: YES), the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4210, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to 0. The detection counter Cd is a counter that increases the value by 1 when the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity and to enter the second starting port 34 is 2 seconds or more. .. When the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity and to enter the second starting port 34 is less than 2 seconds, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to 0. After executing step S4210, the process proceeds to step S4211.

In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the non-electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. If it is determined in step S4211 that the non-electric accessory 34a is in the closed state (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212.

In step S4212, the abnormality detection start flag and the maximum intensity firing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned off. After executing step S4212, this abnormality detection process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4208 that the timer counter Td is 0 (S4208: YES), the process proceeds to step S4213. In step S4213, the value of the detection counter Cd is incremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S4214.

In step S4214, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection counter Cd is 5. If it is determined in step S4214 that the value of the detection counter Cd is not 5, (S4214: NO), this abnormality detection process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4211 that the non-electric accessory 34a is not in the closed state (S4211: NO), or if it is determined in step S4214 that the detection counter Cd is 5, (S4214: YES), step. Proceed to S4215. That is, when the non-electric accessory 34a does not close even though the game ball enters the second start port 34, or the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity and the second start port. If the time required to enter the ball 34 is 2 seconds or more, but it occurs five times in a row, the process proceeds to step S4215.

In step S4215, an error occurrence command is set. The abnormality occurrence command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that an abnormality has occurred, and is obtained by the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of the normal process. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S4215, the process proceeds to step S4212, and the abnormality detection start flag and the maximum intensity firing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned off. After executing step S4212, this abnormality detection process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the reset operation has been performed (S4201: YES), the process proceeds to step S4216. In step S4216, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to 0. After that, this abnormality detection process is terminated.

Next, the command correspondence process (voice emission control) will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 41: S2702).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process. The difference between the command correspondence process in the fourth embodiment and the command correspondence process in the first embodiment is that step S4319 and step S4320, which are processes related to an abnormality occurrence command, have been added to the command correspondence process in the fourth embodiment. It is a point. Since the other processes in the command correspondence process are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S4319, it is determined whether or not a normally occurring command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S4319 that the error occurrence command has been received (S4319: YES), the process proceeds to step S4320.

In step S4320, the error occurrence command handling process is executed. Specifically, by operating the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 41, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. After executing step S4320, the process proceeds to step S4321 to execute other setting processes. After that, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4319 that the error occurrence command has not been received (S4319: NO), the process proceeds to step S4321 without executing step S4320. In the fourth embodiment, the command correspondence process is executed in this way.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is operated by the player so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated. In addition, when the event that the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 does not enter the second starting port 34 within 2 seconds occurs five times in a row, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred even when the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state even though the game ball has entered the second starting port 34.

By making such a determination, an abnormality such as a foreign substance existing in the path through which the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 to the non-electric accessory 34a passes and the game ball not normally circulated, or an operation handle by the player An abnormality such as an abnormality in which the launch control device 80 does not normally control the launch intensity even though the rotation operation amount of the 25 is operated to the maximum or the game ball launch button 26 is operated. Even though the game ball has entered the second starting port 34, the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state and the player is in an unfairly advantageous state, or the player does not perform any operation. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as the closure of the accessory 34a being hindered.

In the present embodiment, when the player operates the operation handle 25 so as to maximize the rotation operation amount, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is used. When the event that the fired game ball did not enter the second starting port 34 within 2 seconds occurred five times in a row, it was determined that an abnormality had occurred, but it was fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81. It may be determined that an abnormality has occurred when an event occurs in which the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 within 2 seconds. In this case, fraud and abnormality can be detected at an early stage. In addition, the number of continuations of the event that the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 does not enter the second starting port 34 within 2 seconds as the threshold value for determining the occurrence of an abnormality is limited to 5 times or 1 time. It can be set to any number without being used.

The value of the timer counter Td is also set to 2 seconds in this embodiment, but other values may be set. For example, in the normal state of the pachinko machine 10, the timer is based on the maximum value that can be taken as the time required for the gaming ball to be launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at the maximum firing intensity and to enter the second starting port 34. The counter Td can be set.

E. Modification example:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible.

E1. Modification 1: Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, if the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 during the period when the first symbol is variablely displayed, the variable time of the first symbol is shortened and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. You may perform a guidance effect to guide you that there is a possibility. For example, the guidance effect may be executed as a demo movie which is an effect performed during the period when the game is not executed, or may be executed as a game turn effect executed during the variable display of the first symbol. .. By executing such a guidance effect, if the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 during the period when the first symbol is variablely displayed, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shortened and the first symbol is changed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the symbol of the above may be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to make the player recognize the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 at an early stage.

E2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, as described in FIG. 9B, only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, but the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are set. Other jackpot types may be set, such as, or a plurality of these jackpot types may be set. Further, in the first embodiment, the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 36 in the 2R normal jackpot is the low frequency winning mode, but it may be set to the high frequency winning mode, and a plurality of types of jackpot types may be selected. It may be set and combined with a high-frequency winning mode or a low-frequency winning mode for each jackpot type, and the degree of advantage to the player may be different for each jackpot type.

E3. Modification 3:
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first liquid crystal display area 41b is displayed relatively larger than the second liquid crystal display area 41c, but the size of these areas is large. A configuration in which the size changes may be adopted. For example, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variablely displayed at the same time, at least one size of the first liquid crystal display symbol display area 41b or the second liquid crystal display symbol display area 41c is set in each area. It may be determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the displayed liquid crystal display symbol. That is, it is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 33 on the center side, first starting port 44 on the right side) and the second starting port 34. You may.

More specifically, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). However, when it is more advantageous for the player than the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display area for the first liquid crystal display area. 41b is displayed larger than the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting slot 34 is the first starting slot. When it is more advantageous for the player than the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of the game ball into (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). May display the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c larger than the first liquid crystal display area 41b.

By doing so, for the player who has recognized the first liquid crystal display symbol and the second liquid crystal display symbol displayed on the display surface 41a, the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to each symbol and the degree of advantage to the player. It is possible to make the player guess about the above and give the player a sense of expectation and urgency.

Further, since the liquid crystal symbol display area corresponding to the jackpot lottery for the player who is advantageous to the player is displayed larger than the other liquid crystal symbol display area, the jackpot lottery for the player who is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is possible to draw attention to the LCD design corresponding to the above, and to give a feeling of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

E4. Modification 4:
In the first embodiment, as shown in step S801 of the determination process for the first starting port (FIG. 21), if the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816. As a process of setting the stop symbol of the first symbol, a stop symbol setting process for disconnection is executed. That is, the game ball first enters the second starting port 34, and then the game ball enters the first starting opening (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). If the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a big hit or a small hit, the first starting opening (center side first starting opening 33, right side first). 1 The hit / fail determination of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting port 44) is not executed, and the stop symbol setting process for disengagement is executed.

Therefore, as an example of this modification, the game ball first enters the second starting port 34, and then the game ball enters the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44). Only when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a big hit, the first starting opening (the first starting opening 33 on the center side, the first on the right side). The winning / failing determination of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting port 44) is not executed. That is, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit, the first starting opening (center side first starting opening 33, right side first starting opening). The winning / failing determination of the jackpot lottery is executed when the game ball enters 44). Hereinafter, the determination process for the first starting port in the modified example 4 will be described.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting port in the modified example 4. The difference between the determination process for the first starting port in the present modification and the determination process for the first starting port in the first embodiment is that the determination process for the first starting port in the present modification is performed in step S801a. Is added. In the determination process for the first starting port in the modification 4, when it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), and when the small hit flag is ON (S801a). : YES), the processing after step S802 is executed.

As described in the first embodiment, the second hit flag is turned on when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a big hit or a small hit. It is a flag that becomes. The small hit flag is a flag that turns ON when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a small hit.

Therefore, in the determination process for the first start port in this modification, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is a small hit, the first start is performed. It is possible to make a configuration in which the winning / failing determination of the jackpot lottery is executed when the game ball enters the mouth (first starting port 33 on the center side, first starting port 44 on the right side).

When the determination process for the first starting port in this modification is adopted, a big hit triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). When the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit and the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a small hit, the step of the game state transition process (FIG. 29). In S1605, in determining whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode, it is necessary to perform a process of determining which lottery result triggers the shift to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, for example, it may be decided to shift to the open / close execution mode with the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the entry into the starting port of the one whose symbol change ends first. At the same time, the big hit flag or the small hit flag based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery that did not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to realize the determination process for the first starting port in this modification.

E5. Modification 5:
In the variable time setting process (FIG. 22) for the first starting port of the first embodiment, the first starting is performed by executing steps S902 and S904 in determining the variable time of the first symbol. The decision was made based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the opening (first starting opening 33 on the center side, first starting opening 44 on the right side), but further, entry into the second starting opening 34. The fluctuation time of the first symbol may be determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the ball.

Specifically, the process of determining whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a big hit, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In addition to the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port, the process of determining whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the ball is a small hit is added to the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, Variable time for each combination of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 44) on the right side and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34). By setting the table, this modification can be realized.

E6. Modification 6:
In the first embodiment, the skip command setting process (FIG. 28) is executed in the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60, but may be executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90. In this case, the sound / light side MPU 92 may acquire the information necessary for the determination process in step S1501, step S1502, and step S1504 from the main control device 60 and use it for each determination process. According to such a configuration, the process corresponding to the setting process of the skip command can be executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

E7. Modification 7:
In the above embodiment, the first fluctuation stop processing is the processing mode shown in FIG. 23, and the second fluctuation stop processing is the processing mode shown in FIG. 27, but other processing modes may be adopted as these two processing modes. good.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing in the modification 7. Further, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing in the modified example 7.

The difference between the first fluctuation stop processing in this modification and the first fluctuation stop processing in the first embodiment is that in this modification, the process of stopping the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit as step S1011 and step S1012. The point is that a process of turning off the second changing flag is added.

Further, the difference between the second fluctuation stop processing in this modification and the second fluctuation stop processing in the first embodiment is that in this modification, the process of stopping the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit as step S1411 The point is that a process of turning off the first changing flag is added as step S1412.

When such a processing mode is adopted, when the process of stopping the first symbol and the second symbol at the same time is executed, the process of stopping the first symbol and the process of stopping the second symbol are performed. Since it is executed as a series of processes in the same thread, it is possible to stop the first symbol and the second symbol at the same time with higher accuracy.

E8. Modification 8:
In the first embodiment, the game time control process is the processing mode shown in FIG. 18, but another processing mode may be adopted as the game time control process.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the game rotation control process in the modified example 8. In the game time control process in the modified example 8, the subroutine of the first fluctuation stop process (FIG. 18: S504) and the second fluctuation stop process (FIG. 18: S507) executed in the game time control process of the first embodiment are performed. As shown in FIG. 62, the function corresponding to the processing including the two subroutines including the subroutine is executed by one subroutine as the fluctuation stop processing in step S508. By doing so, it is possible to realize simplification of processing.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process (FIG. 62: S508), which is a subroutine of the game turn control process in this modification. The fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in step S4401 that the first changing flag is ON (S4401: YES), the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. If it is determined in step S4402 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S4402: YES), the process proceeds to step S4403, and the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first symbol. Stop the fluctuation of the symbol of 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the first changing flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S4405, and it is determined whether or not the first hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the variable display of the first symbol is a big hit. If it is determined in step S4405 that the first hit flag is ON (S4406: YES), the process proceeds to step S4406.

In step S4406, the first hit flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S4407.

In step S4407, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the second symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in step S4407 that the second changing flag is ON (S4407: YES), the process proceeds to step S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4407 that the second changing flag is not ON (S4407: NO), the fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

In step S4408, the fluctuation of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S4409, and the second changing flag is turned off. After executing step S4409, this fluctuation stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4401 that the first changing flag is not ON (S4401: NO), in step S4402, the fluctuation display time of the first symbol in the first symbol display unit 37a is not completed. If it is determined (S4402: NO), or if it is determined in step S4405 that the first hit flag is not ON (S4405: NO), the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4410, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the second symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in step S4410 that the second changing flag is ON (S4410: YES), the process proceeds to step S4411.

In step S4411, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S4411 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S4411: YES), the process proceeds to step S4412, and the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol. Stop the fluctuation of the symbol of 2. Then, the process proceeds to step S4413.

In step S4413, the second changing flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S4444, and it is determined whether or not the second hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the variable display of the second symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If it is determined in step S4414 that the second hit flag is ON (S44414: YES), the process proceeds to step S4415.

In step S4415, the second hit flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S4416.

In step S4416, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in step S4416 that the first changing flag is ON (S4416: YES), the process proceeds to step S4417. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4416 that the first changing flag is not ON (S4416: NO), the fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

In step S4417, the fluctuation of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S4418, and the first changing flag is turned off. After executing step S4418, this fluctuation stop process is terminated.

In step S4410, when it is determined that the second changing flag is not ON (S4410: NO), in step S4411, it is determined that the variation display time of the second symbol in the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended. If (S4411: NO) or if it is determined in step S4414 that the second hit flag is not ON (S4414: NO), the fluctuation stop process is terminated.

In the first embodiment, the first fluctuation stop processing is performed in the determination process of whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol ends and the determination process of whether or not the fluctuation time of the second symbol ends. (FIG. 18: S504) and the second fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 18: S507) were executed once each. As in this modification, the subroutine of the first fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 18: S504) and the subroutine of the second fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 18: S507) executed in the game round control process of the first embodiment are combined. By executing one subroutine as the fluctuation stop processing, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol executed in each of the first fluctuation stop processing and the second fluctuation stop processing ends. It suffices to execute the determination of whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol 2 ends once in the fluctuation stop processing, and the processing can be simplified.

E9. Modification 9:
In the above embodiment, the skip effect and the non-skip effect are executed, but various other effects may be executed. For example, a skip promotion effect may be executed in which a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 to urge the player to shorten the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. ..

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the skip promotion effect. In the skip promotion effect in the present embodiment, the variation time of the first symbol can be shortened to a shorter time than the preset variation time by displaying the character "Skip!" On the display surface 41a. It is a production that suggests that there is sex. By executing such an effect, the player is urged to insert the game ball into the second starting port 34 and shorten the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. By executing the skip promotion effect while the first symbol is displayed, the game is played in the second starting port 34 by operating the game ball launch button 26 or operating the operation handle 25 with the maximum rotation operation amount. It is possible to encourage the player to let the ball enter.

E10. Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, the skip effect and the non-skip effect are executed, but various other effects may be executed. For example, the skip suppression effect described below may be executed.

When the player operates the game ball launch button 26 when the remaining time of the change time of the first symbol is short, the change of the second symbol due to the game ball entering the second starting port 34 by the operation. The display and stop display may be executed during the variable display of the first symbol, which is executed after the variable display of the first symbol currently in progress. In this case, it is possible that the variation time for the first symbol variation display that is currently being executed is not shortened, but the variation time for the first symbol variation display that is executed next time is shortened. There is a possibility that the shortening of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is executed at a timing not intended by the player.

Therefore, the remaining time of the preset variation time of the first symbol, which is the timing after the first symbol starts the variable display due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port, is preset. It is suggested that it is better not to let the game ball enter the second starting port 34 for the purpose of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to the player at the timing shorter than the time tl as the threshold value. The skip suppression effect, which is an effect to be performed, may be executed.

As the time tl set as the threshold value, for example, a big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 from the time when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, the time Tm7 in FIG. 10). Is a small hit, and a time length (hereinafter, also referred to as time tra) corresponding to the time until the time when the operation of the variable winning device 36 is started (for example, the time Tm11 in FIG. 10) can be applied. That is, it is the timing after the first symbol starts the variable display due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port, and the remaining time of the preset variable time of the first symbol is shorter than the time tra. At the timing when it becomes, the skip suppression effect is executed.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the skip suppression effect. The skip suppression effect in the present embodiment is an effect suggesting that the female character should not allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 for the purpose of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol.

In this way, by executing the skip suppression effect, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 during the variable display of the first symbol currently in progress, so that the first execution is executed next time. It is possible to prevent the variation time of the first symbol from being shortened with respect to the variation display of the symbol at a timing not intended by the player.

In the above description, by executing the skip suppression effect, the player is prevented from entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 for the purpose of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol. It is also possible to realize the effect of the skip suppression effect by the skip promotion effect described in the above modification 9.

Specifically, the skip promotion effect is repeatedly executed at the timing when the first symbol starts the variable display due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port. After that, when the remaining time of the preset variation time of the first symbol becomes shorter than the time tl as the preset threshold value, the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped. By repeatedly executing the skip promotion effect, it was urged to insert the game ball into the second starting port 34 and shorten the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time. Nevertheless, when the execution of the skip promotion effect is suddenly stopped, the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 34 and sets the fluctuation time of the first symbol to be shorter than the preset fluctuation time. It is interpreted that it is better to stop shortening to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 for the purpose of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol, and the skip promotion effect is used to perform the skip suppression effect. A similar effect can be achieved.

As the time tl set as the threshold value, in addition to the tla described above, the second symbol starts the variable display from the time when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, the time Tm7 in FIG. 10). The second time from the time length (hereinafter, also referred to as time tlb) to the time point (for example, time Tm9 in FIG. 10) or the time point when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10). The time length (hereinafter, also referred to as time tlc) up to the time when the detection sensor of the starting port 34 detects the entry of the game ball (for example, until the time Tm8 in FIG. 10) can be applied.

E11. Modification 11:
As described in the above modification 10, the skip promotion effect is used in such a manner that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped when the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol becomes shorter than the time tl. In this case, the player presumes that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is short and the end of the variation display of the first symbol is near by recognizing that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed has stopped. It will be like. By utilizing such a change in the psychology of the player due to the execution / stop of the skip promotion effect, the following effects can be executed.

FIG. 66 is a time chart showing the timing of executing the skip promotion effect in the modification 11.

The pachinko machine 10 suggests that the normal reach effect and the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery are higher than those at the time of executing the normal reach effect as the reach effect executed during the variable display of the first symbol. It is possible to perform a production and a special reach production that suggests that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than that of the super reach production. That is, when the super reach effect is executed after the reach effect, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the reach effect is executed, and when the special reach effect is executed after the super reach effect. Has a higher probability of winning the jackpot lottery than when only the reach effect and the super reach effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 66, in this modification, the reach effect executed during the variable display of the first symbol and the skip promotion effect are repeatedly executed until a predetermined time before the end of the super reach effect, and each reach effect is performed. When the remaining time until the end becomes shorter than the time tld, the execution of the skip promotion effect is stopped. Hereinafter, the time chart will be described in chronological order.

When the player recognizes that the reach effect has been executed, the player presumes that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot lottery in the game times, and has a sense of expectation. After that, if it is recognized that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed has stopped during the execution of the reach effect, it is presumed that the variable display of the first symbol ends. As a result, the player presumes that the first design effect does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect. In other words, the player presumes that it is unlikely that he will win the jackpot lottery in the game, and feels a sense of loss and becomes psychologically discouraged.

However, after recognizing that the super reach effect was executed, the player guessed that it was unlikely to win the jackpot lottery in the game, but that guess was overturned. Along with feeling anticipation again, I feel unexpected and inflection occurs in my mind.

After that, even though the super reach effect was executed and the player had a feeling of expectation again, after that, when it was recognized that the skip promotion effect that had been repeatedly executed was stopped during the execution of the spar reach effect. , The player presumes that the variable display of the first symbol ends again. As a result, the player speculates that the first symbol production does not develop into a special reach production, and again feels a sense of loss and becomes psychologically discouraged.

However, after recognizing that the special production was executed, the player guessed that it was unlikely to win the jackpot lottery in the game, but that guess was overturned again. As a result, there is further unexpectedness and a sense of expectation, and even more intonation occurs in the mind. After that, the player becomes aware of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game times by executing the lottery result notification effect. In the lottery result notification production, a big hit or a miss is announced.

In this way, by devising the timing of execution / stop of the skip promotion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of loss, and it is possible to give an intonation to the player's feelings. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

E12. Modification 12:
Other configurations may be adopted as the configuration of the game board 30. For example, the arrangement position of the through gate 35a and the central side first starting port 33 is not limited to the arrangement position shown in FIG.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (Example 1) as the configuration of the game board 30. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 67, the central first starting port 33 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has entered (passed) through the through gate 35a enters. More specifically, the central first starting port 33 is arranged directly below the through gate 35a.

With such a configuration of the game board 30, when the game ball enters the central side first start port 33 after entering the through gate 35a, the non-electric accessory 34a opens and the second start port 34 The game ball can be put into the second starting port 34, and the player can put the game ball into the second starting port 34. As a result, it is possible to realize game playability such that the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 on condition that the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 33 on the central side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game mainly intended to allow the game ball to enter the second start port 34 without the purpose of allowing the game ball to enter the first start port 33 on the central side. can do.

E13. Modification 13:
As the configuration of the game board 30, the following configuration may be adopted in addition to the above-described embodiment and the above-mentioned modification 12.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (Example 2) as the configuration of the game board 30. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 68, the through gate 35a is arranged below the right first starting port 44. By configuring the game board 30 in this way, the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 is operated so that the game ball is always distributed on the right side of the game board 30, so that the first start on the central side is started. It is possible to enter the ball into the mouth 33, the through gate 35a, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35b, and the right first starting port 44, and the game can be made simpler.

E14. Modification 14:
Further, as a configuration of the game board 30, for example, a game board 30 may be provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the game board 30 including the distribution mechanism 150. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 69, the game balls that have entered the distribution mechanism 150 are alternately distributed to the through gate 35a and the central first starting port 33.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing how the distribution mechanism 150 distributes game balls. As shown in FIG. 70A, when one game ball PB1 enters the distribution mechanism 150 from the ball entry portion 151, the game ball PB1 comes into contact with the blade portion 152. Upon contact with the game ball PB1, the blade portion 152 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle about the shaft portion 153, and the game ball PB1 is distributed to the exit portion 154. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the game ball PB1 distributed to the ball ejection unit 154 exits from the ball ejection unit 154 and enters the central first starting port 33. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the blade portion 152 is in a state of being rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, unlike the state of FIG. 70 (a).

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when another game ball PB2 enters the distribution mechanism 150 from the ball entry portion 151 in this state, the game ball PB2 comes into contact with the blade portion 152. Upon contact with the game ball PB2, the blade portion 152 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle around the shaft portion 153, and distributes the game ball PB2 to the exit portion 155. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the game ball PB2 distributed to the ball ejection section 155 exits from the ball ejection section 155 and enters the through gate 35a. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the blade portion 152 returns to the state of FIG. 70 (a). In this way, the distribution mechanism 150 repeats the operations of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (d) so that the game ball entered from the entry portion 151 is transferred to the through gate 35a and the central first starting port 33. Alternately distribute to.

With such a configuration of the game board 30, the player can enter the game ball into the through gate 35a and the central side first starting port 33 by inserting the game ball into the distribution mechanism 150. As a result, the game ball can be put into the second starting port 34. That is, it is possible to realize game playability such that the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34 on condition that the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 33 on the central side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game mainly intended to allow the game ball to enter the second start port 34 without the purpose of allowing the game ball to enter the first start port 33 on the central side. can do.

E15. Modification 15:
As a configuration of the game board 30, when the operation handle 25 is operated, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 cannot reach the area, and when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is not reachable. The specific area SPA that the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 81 can reach may be included in the game area PA.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 30 in the modified example 15. In FIG. 71, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the locus Tr1 in which the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 circulates in the game area PA, and the operation handle 25 are operated with the maximum rotation operation amount. The locus Tr2 in which the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 circulates in the game area PA when the game ball is launched is shown. As shown in the figure, the locus Tr1 is located above the gaming area PA from the locus Tr2. Further, the above-mentioned specific region SPA refers to a region including the locus Tr1 but not the locus Tr2. The pachinko machine 10 in this modification is configured to include such a specific region SPA in the gaming region PA.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 by operating the gaming ball launching button 26 depends on the operation of the operation handle 25. This is the firing intensity of the gaming ball that cannot be launched by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. More specifically, the firing intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launching button 26 is such that the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 launches by operating the operation handle 25. Greater than the maximum firing intensity of a game ball that can be made.

Further, in this modification, as shown in the figure, a second starting port 34 and a non-electric accessory 34a are provided in the specific region SPA. That is, the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launch button 26 can enter the second starting port 34, but the game ball launch mechanism is operated by operating the operation handle 25. The game ball launched by 81 cannot enter the second starting port 34.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a new game property in which the operation of the game ball launch button 26 is indispensable in order to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. More specifically, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is shortened to a shorter time than the preset fluctuation time by inserting the game ball into the second starting port 34 while the first symbol is variable display. In order to do so, it is possible to create new game characteristics such that it is essential to operate the game ball launch button 26 to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

E16. Modification 16:
As a configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launch button is configured so that the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 can be released from the guide rail 31 by operating the operation handle 25. It may be configured so that the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 is not discharged from the guide rail 31 by operating 26.

Specifically, when the area in which the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and released from the guide rail 31 is distributed is defined as the distribution area, the operation handle 25 is operated by operating the operation handle 25 to play a game. The game ball launched by the ball launching mechanism 81 is configured to be able to be discharged from the guide rail 31 into the distribution area. On the other hand, the game ball launch button 26 is configured so that the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launch button 26 is not discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 may have the configuration described below.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 30 in the modified example 16. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 in this modification is a game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81, and is distributed as a guiding means for guiding the game ball that has not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area. It includes a mechanism 34b and an induction rail 34c. Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification is provided with a second starting port 34d at a position where a game ball circulated through the guide rail 34c can enter.

A game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and not discharged from the guide rail 31 into the distribution area distributes the guide rail 31 in the direction opposite to that when it is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81. Then, the ball is distributed to the guide rail 34c by the distribution mechanism 34b, and then the ball enters the second starting port 34d.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 enters the second starting port 34d.

As shown in FIG. 73A, the game ball PB launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 circulates through the guide rail 31 toward the distribution region.

As shown in FIG. 73B, when the game ball PB passes through the position where the distribution mechanism 34b is installed, the distribution mechanism 34b that closes the guide rail 31 is provided by the game ball launch mechanism 81. The lead rail 31 is rotated in the opening direction by the propulsive force, and the lead rail 31 is distributed in the direction of the distribution region. After the game ball PB has passed, the distribution mechanism 34b rotates again in the direction of closing the guide rail 31. The game ball PB that has not been discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution region circulates the guide rail 31 in the direction opposite to that when it is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the game ball PB which is not discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution region and circulates in the direction opposite to the time when the guide rail 31 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is a distribution mechanism. The ball is distributed to the guide rail 34c by 34b, and then enters the second starting port 34d.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a new game property in which the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 is not released from the guide rail 31 by operating the game ball launch button 26.

Further, the second start is provided with a distribution mechanism 34b and a guide rail 34c for guiding the game balls that have not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution region, and the game balls guided by the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c can enter the ball. Since the mouth 34d is provided, in order to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34d, a new operation handle 25 or a game ball launch button 26 is operated so that the game ball is not discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area. It is possible to create playability.

Further, in a normal gaming machine, the guide rail 31 is structurally configured to be invisible to the player. Therefore, after being launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 and distributed through the guide rail 31, the guide rail 31 is distributed in the opposite direction, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c are distributed, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34d. The movement of is invisible to the player. Therefore, for example, while the first symbol is in variable display, the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to allow the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 to enter the second starting port 34d, and the second is When the fluctuation time of the symbol 1 is shortened to a shorter time than the preset fluctuation time, the game ball process from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to entering the second starting port 34d is performed by the player. Since it cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball launch button 26 itself has a function of shifting the variable display of the first symbol to the stop display, and new game playability can be achieved. At the same time as creating it, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this modification, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guidance rail 34c are provided as the guiding means until the game ball not discharged from the guiding rail 31 is entered into the second starting port 34d, but the guiding means is guided. A recess may be formed on the rail 31. Then, the second starting port 34d may be provided inside the recess. The game ball that has not been released from the guide rail 31 flows through the guide rail 31 in the opposite direction and is guided to the second starting port 34d by falling into the recess, and then enters the second starting port 34. By doing so, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c can be omitted, and the structure can be simplified.

E17. Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment and modification, the configuration in which the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launch button 26 is configured by a program control process (game ball launch control process) executed by the main MPU 62. Although realized, the configuration in which the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the operation of the game ball launch button 26 may be realized by a mechanical structure. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball launch button 26 and the internal gear that operates by rotating the operation handle 25 are mechanically connected via a plurality of gears or the like. Then, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the internal gear operates to launch the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 with a predetermined firing intensity. By adopting such a configuration, the program control process related to the operation of the game ball launch button 26 can be simplified or omitted.

As an example, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the internal gear operates more than when the operation handle 25 is operated with the maximum rotation operation amount, so that the operation handle 25 is even operated. The game ball may be configured to be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 with a firing intensity stronger than the maximum firing intensity of. With this configuration, the program control process related to the operation of the game ball launch button 26 in the modification 15 can be simplified or omitted.

E18. Modification 18:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

F. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature A1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) is transferred to the first ball entry unit (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). When the first fluctuation time preset as the fluctuation time, which is the time for variable display of the first symbol, is elapsed, while the fluctuation display is triggered by the establishment of the first fluctuation condition based on the entry of the ball. The first symbol control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92) for stopping and displaying the first symbol, and
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) is based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion (second starting port 34). The second symbol is stopped and displayed when the second variable time preset as the variable time, which is the time for variable display of the second symbol, has elapsed, while the variable display is triggered by the establishment of the variable condition. 2 Symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound light side MPU92),
A variable time shortening means (function for executing step S504) for executing a variable time shortening process for shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variable time, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The variable time shortening means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the variable time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the second symbol to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means. It is determined whether or not (step S801, step S1001).
A gaming machine that features that.

According to the feature A1, the fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, for example, the first fluctuation time preset in a predetermined game time is executed. When the time is long, the variable time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with his or her concentration on the game in the predetermined game times. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine described in Feature A1.
The variable time shortening means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the variable time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means. Whether or not to determine (step S1201)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A2, the variable time shortening means is based on the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means when the first symbol and the second symbol are variable display. Decide whether to execute the variable time reduction process. Therefore, the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means is different depending on whether the variable time shortening process is executed or not. Therefore, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means by recognizing whether or not the variation time shortening process is executed, which is an expectation different from the conventional one. It is possible to give a feeling and playability.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2.
The probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination (big hit and small hit) in which the variable time shortening process is executed is higher than the probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination in which the variable time shortening process is not executed. Is also set to be high (Fig. 8: Win / fail table for the second starting port)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A3, the fluctuation time shortening process can be executed with high probability.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A3.
The variable time shortening means is
This is the case where the second symbol starts the variable display after the first symbol starts the variable display.
The combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays does not satisfy the specific condition, and the combination of the second symbols that the second symbol control means stops and displays satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable time shortening process is executed in some cases.

According to the feature A4, when there is a predetermined process to be executed when the combination of the first symbols meets a specific condition, or when the combination of the second symbols satisfies a specific condition, the first step is made. It is possible to prevent both the first symbol and the second symbol from satisfying a specific condition and conflicting with each other in the execution conditions of a predetermined process.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A4.
The second fluctuation condition is
While the second symbol is established based on the entry into the second entry portion during the period when the second symbol is not displayed in a variable manner,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is not established based on the entry into the second entry portion during the period in which the second symbol is variablely displayed.

According to the feature A5, the second fluctuation condition is satisfied based on the entry into the second ball entry portion during the period when the second symbol is not variablely displayed, while the second symbol is variablely displayed. It does not hold based on the entry into the second entry section during the period. In other words, it has a so-called hold function that holds the entry of the game ball when the game ball enters the second entry section during the period when the second symbol is variablely displayed. not. Therefore, it is easy for the player to control the timing at which the second fluctuation condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to control the timing of executing the variation time shortening process.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A5.
The variation time shortening means causes the first symbol displaying the variation to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the second symbol displaying the variation is stopped and displayed, thereby causing the first symbol to be stopped and displayed. The fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time of the symbol of the above to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time is executed.
The first fluctuation time is determined by lottery from a plurality of preset fluctuation times.
The second fluctuation time is determined by lottery from a plurality of preset fluctuation times.
A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the second fluctuation time determined by the lottery is shorter than the expected value of the first fluctuation time determined by the lottery.

If the second fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation time, and if the second symbol starts the fluctuation display after the first symbol starts the fluctuation display, the second symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the first symbol is stopped and displayed before that, the first symbol is stopped and displayed by stopping and displaying the first symbol that is variablely displayed, triggered by the timing when the second symbol is stopped and displayed. It is not possible to execute the variable time shortening process for shortening the variable time of the first variable time to a shorter time than the first variable time.

According to the feature A6, since the expected value of the second variable time determined by the lottery is shorter than the expected value of the first variable time determined by the lottery, the first symbol is after the variable display is started. Even when the symbol of 2 starts the variable display, the variable time shortening process can be executed.

[Feature A7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A6.
The second ball entry portion (second start port 34) is from the first ball entry portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) in the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine characterized by being located upstream.

When the second ball entry portion is arranged downstream from the first ball entry section, if the game ball enters the first ball entry section, the second entry section also The game ball becomes easy to enter, and the variable time shortening process unintended by the player is executed.

According to the feature A7, since the second entry portion is arranged upstream from the first entry portion with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball is located in the first entry portion. It is possible to put the game ball into a state in which the ball enters but does not enter the second ball entry portion, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the fluctuation time shortening process unintended by the player.

[Feature A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A7.
The entry of the game ball into the second entry section is restricted, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry section is possible only when a specific entry condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by having a ball limiting mechanism (non-electric accessory 34a).

According to the feature A8, since the ball entry restriction mechanism is provided, it is possible to suppress the player's unintended entry of the game ball into the second entry portion.

[Feature A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A8.
Equipped with a production execution means to execute the production
When the first symbol has a variable display and the variable time shortening means executes the variable time shortening process.
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that a stop display effect (skip effect) suggesting that the first symbol that is variablely displayed is stopped and displayed is executed.

According to the feature A9, since the stop display effect is executed, the player can recognize that the variation time shortening process is executed.

[Feature A10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A9.
Equipped with a production execution means to execute the production
The effect executing means is
When the first variation condition is satisfied and the first symbol starts variation display, the first effect (first symbol effect) is executed.
The case where the second variation condition is satisfied and the second symbol starts the variation display after the first variation condition is satisfied and the first symbol starts the variation display. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the fluctuation time shortening means does not execute the fluctuation time shortening process, a second effect (non-skipable effect, jackpot notification effect) is executed.

According to the feature A10, when it is determined that the variable time shortening means does not execute the variable time shortening process, the second effect is executed, so that the player recognizes that the variable time shortening process is not executed. Can be made to.

[Feature A11]
The gaming machine according to the feature A10.
The effect executing means is
When the first symbol has a variable display and the second effect (non-skipable effect, jackpot notification effect) is executed.
The effect to be executed as the second effect is selected from a plurality of preset effects according to the remaining time of the first fluctuation time (step S3302).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature A11, since the effect to be executed as the second effect is selected from a plurality of preset effects according to the remaining time of the first fluctuation time, the first symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute an effect according to the timing, and it is possible to add intonation and narrative to the effect. In addition, since the time required for the second production is shorter than the first fluctuation time, an event such as ending the second production in the middle, or even if the second production is completed, the first fluctuation time It is possible to suppress an event such as surplus, and the second effect can be executed as an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Feature A12]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to the feature A11.
Equipped with a production execution means to execute the production
The effect executing means is
It is characterized by executing a guidance effect to guide that the first symbol may be stopped and displayed if the ball is entered into the second ball entry portion during the period when the first symbol is variablely displayed. A gaming machine.

According to the feature A12, since the guidance effect is executed, the player may stop and display the first symbol if he / she enters the second entry portion during the period when the first symbol is variablely displayed. You can recognize that there is.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature B1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) is transferred to the first ball entry unit (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). When the first fluctuation time preset as the fluctuation time, which is the time for variable display of the first symbol, is elapsed, while the fluctuation display is triggered by the establishment of the first fluctuation condition based on the entry of the ball. The first symbol control means (main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 92) for stopping and displaying the first symbol, and
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) is based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion (second starting port 34). The second symbol is stopped and displayed when the second variable time preset as the variable time, which is the time for variable display of the second symbol, has elapsed, while the variable display is triggered by the establishment of the variable condition. 2 Symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound light side MPU92),
A variable time shortening means (function for executing step S504) for executing a variable time shortening process for shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variable time, and
The shortening promotion means (at a position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched at the maximum firing intensity) that enables the player to intentionally encourage the execution of the fluctuation time shortening process by the fluctuation time shortening means. 2 Configuration of the game board 30 provided with the starting port 34, the game ball launch button 26), and
A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature B1, the fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, for example, the first fluctuation time preset in a predetermined game time is executed. When the time is long, the variable time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with his or her concentration on the game in the predetermined game times. Further, since it is possible for the player to intentionally prompt the execution of the variable time shortening process, the player can be prompted to execute the variable time shortening process at a desired timing. For example, when the player feels that a jackpot cannot be expected in a predetermined game and wants to end the predetermined game earlier, the player intentionally urges the player to execute the variable time shortening process, and the predetermined game is played. Can be terminated early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored due to interruption of concentration in each game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine described in feature B1.
The variable time shortening means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the variable time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the second symbol to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means. Judge whether or not
The shortening promoting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it enables a player to intentionally promote the establishment of the second variation condition.

According to the feature B2, it is possible to simplify the mechanism that enables the player to intentionally encourage the execution of the variation time shortening process. That is, by enabling the player to intentionally prompt the player to satisfy the second variation condition, the variation display of the second symbol by the second symbol control means is promoted. As a result, the execution of the variation time shortening process is promoted based on the combination of the second symbols displayed by the second symbol control means to stop.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine described in feature B2.
Equipped with an operation means (operation handle 25) operated by the player to launch the game ball.
The shortening promoting means includes an operation assisting means (game ball launch button 26) that assists the operation by the player.
When the operation assisting means is operated by the player, the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the operation of the operating means is increased, and the probability that the gaming ball enters the second entry portion is high. A gaming machine characterized by performing a firing intensity adjustment process.

According to the feature B3, since the operation assisting means is provided, it is possible to facilitate the operation that the player should perform in order to intentionally encourage the player to execute the fluctuation time shortening process by the fluctuation time shortening means.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to the feature B3.
Equipped with an operating means that the player operates to launch the game ball,
The second ball entry portion is a position where the game ball launched at the maximum intensity enters when the operating means is operated by the player so that the launch intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum intensity. A gaming machine characterized by being placed in.

According to the feature B4, the second ball entry portion is arranged at a position where the game ball enters when the operating means is operated by the player so that the firing intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum strength. Therefore, the player can enter the game ball into the second entry portion by the easy operation of the operating means. That is, the player can intentionally put the game ball into the second ball entry portion by the easy operation of the operation means, and as a result, the game is executed by the fluctuation time shortening means. Can be intentionally encouraged by a person.

The inventions of the feature A group and the feature B group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various productions are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, in each game round, an effect is executed according to the fluctuation time of the symbol in the game round.

However, when the fluctuation time of the symbol in a predetermined game time is long, there is a problem that the player loses his / her concentration on the game and becomes bored, and the interest of the game is lowered.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is desired to improve the technology for the purpose of suppressing the decline in the interest of the game and further improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
The first symbol control means (main side MPU 62) that variablely displays the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display device (first symbol display unit 37a) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion. , Sound light side MPU92),
The second symbol control means (main side MPU 62) that variablely displays the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display device (second symbol display unit 37b) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion. , Sound light side MPU92),
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second symbol control means starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means variablely displays the first symbol.
The first symbol control means prohibits the second symbol control means from starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is variablely displayed (second embodiment and the first). 3 Variable start processing for the first starting port in the embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the case of executing a predetermined process in which there is a correlation between the variable display of the first symbol and the variable display of the second symbol, the variable display of the first symbol is performed when the second symbol is variable display. Is started, there may be a difficulty in executing the predetermined process, or a problem may occur in the playability of the gaming machine.

According to the feature C1, the second symbol control means controls the first symbol even though the first symbol control means starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol is variablely displayed. The means prohibits the second symbol control means from starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the variable display of the second symbol may be started while the first symbol is variable display, but the variable display of the first symbol is not started during the variable display of the second symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in executing the predetermined process and the problem in the playability of the gaming machine.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine described in Feature C1.
The first symbol control means is
When the second symbol control means variablely displays the second symbol, and the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means is a combination satisfying a specific condition. Only, it is prohibited to start the variation display of the first symbol (variation start processing for the first starting port in the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C2, the first symbol control means is prohibited from starting the variable display of the first symbol, and the second symbol control means is variable display of the second symbol. Therefore, the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means is limited to a combination satisfying a specific condition. In other cases, the second symbol control means is the second symbol. The variable display of the first symbol can be started when the variable display is performed. Therefore, the frequency of the first symbol is higher than that of the control that prohibits the second symbol control means from starting the variable display of the first symbol in all cases where the second symbol is variablely displayed. The variable display can be started.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
The first symbol control means is
When the first symbol is variablely displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second entry portion (first variable stop processing).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C3, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second entry portion. For example, when the fluctuation time of the first symbol set in advance in a predetermined game time is long, the player causes the game ball to enter the second entry portion to stop and display the first symbol. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being bored due to interruption of concentration in the predetermined game times, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3.
The second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position that allows a player to intentionally insert a gaming ball.

According to the feature C4, the player can intentionally change and display the second symbol. Further, in the case where the first symbol is variablely displayed, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the ball enters the second entry portion, so that the player intentionally displays the first symbol. The symbol 1 can be stopped and displayed.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to the feature C4.
A gaming machine comprising an auxiliary means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting a player to intentionally enter a gaming ball into the second entry portion.

According to the feature C5, since the auxiliary means is provided, it is easy for the player to intentionally enter the game ball into the second entry portion. Further, in the case where the first symbol is variablely displayed, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second entry portion, so that the auxiliary means is a game. It makes it easy for a person to intentionally stop and display the first symbol.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group solves the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various processes have been added and improved for the purpose of improving the interest of games.

However, with the addition and improvement of various processes, there are problems that it becomes difficult to execute a predetermined process and that a problem is caused in playability.

Here, in order to avoid the above problem, further technical improvement is desired.

<Characteristic D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
The first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) that starts the variable display of the first symbol when the game ball enters the first entry unit.
The second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) that starts the variable display of the second symbol when the game ball enters the second entry unit.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the first symbol starts the variable display and the second symbol starts the variable display,
Based on the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the stop display of the first symbol, the effect to be executed triggered by the start of the variable display of the second symbol is determined (step). S1501, step S3302)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D1, various effects can be executed according to the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the stop display of the first symbol. Further, since the effect to be executed is determined triggered by the start of the variable display of the second symbol, the player can be made to recognize the start of the variable display of the second symbol. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine described in feature D1.
The first symbol display means is
When the first symbol is variable display, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion (first variable stop process).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D2, in the gaming machine that stops and displays the first symbol when the gaming ball enters the second entry portion, the player is notified to start the variable display of the second symbol. In addition to recognizing it, it is possible to execute an effect of recognizing the stop display of the first symbol. Therefore, by executing the effect, the player strongly recognizes the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion, the start of the variable display of the second symbol, and the stop display of the first symbol. Can be made to.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.
The second ball entry portion is arranged at a position where the player can intentionally enter the game ball (a position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched at the maximum firing intensity). A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature D3, since the second ball entry portion is arranged at a position that allows the player to intentionally enter the game ball, the player intentionally has the second symbol. The variable display can be started. Then, by executing the effect determined by the effect execution unit in the feature D1, the player intentionally enters the second ball entry unit to start the variation table of the second symbol. You can make them recognize that.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to the feature D3.
A gaming machine comprising an auxiliary means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting a player to intentionally enter a gaming ball into the second entry portion.

According to the feature D4, since the player is provided with an auxiliary means for assisting the player to intentionally enter the game ball into the second entry portion, the player intentionally enters the game ball into the second entry portion. It becomes easy to enter the ball, and it becomes easy to intentionally start the variation display of the second symbol. Then, by executing the effect determined by the effect execution unit in the feature D1, the player is intentionally made to enter the game ball into the second entry unit, so that the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. It is possible to recognize that it has been started.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4.
When the second symbol starts the variable display while the first symbol is variable display.
The effect executing means is
As the effect to be executed based on the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the stop display of the first symbol, the variable display of the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggested stop display effect (skip effect).

According to the feature D5, by executing the stop display effect, the player can be made to recognize the start of the variable display of the second symbol, and the first symbol can be made to recognize the stop display.

<Characteristic E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature E1]
The first special information is acquired when the game ball enters the first entry section, and the second special information is acquired when the game ball enters the second entry section. Information acquisition means and
Based on the first special information, the first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) for displaying the first symbol, and
Based on the second special information, a second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) for displaying the second symbol, and
Based on the first special information, a first display image (an image displayed in the first liquid crystal display area 41b) which is an image corresponding to the first symbol is displayed, and the second special information is displayed. An image display means for displaying a second display image, which is an image corresponding to the second symbol (an image displayed in the second liquid crystal display symbol display area 41c), based on the above.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is set in the display image. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined based on the corresponding special information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1).

According to the feature E1, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the special information corresponding to the display image, so that the image is displayed on the image display means. It is possible to make the player who recognizes the displayed image guess the content of the special information corresponding to the displayed image, and give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in the feature E1.
The image display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is set in the display image. A gaming machine characterized in that a determination is made based on the degree of advantage of the corresponding special information to the player.

According to the feature E2, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the degree of advantage to the player regarding the special information corresponding to the display image. , The player who recognizes the display image displayed on the image display means can be made to guess the degree of advantage to the player regarding the special information corresponding to the display image, and the player can be given a sense of expectation.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.
The image display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner,
When the first special information is more advantageous to the player than the second special information, the first display image is displayed larger than the second display image.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second special information is more advantageous to the player than the first special information, the second display image is displayed larger than the first display image.

According to the feature E3, the display image corresponding to the special information of the one that is advantageous to the player is displayed larger than the other display image, so that the special information of the one that is advantageous to the player is supported. It is possible to draw attention to the displayed image and give a feeling of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3.
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner,
The first symbol display means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the gaming ball enters the second entry portion.

According to the feature E4, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second entry section, so that the player can enter the game ball into the second entry section. Therefore, the variable display of the first symbol can be stopped and displayed in a short time. At that time, since the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the special information corresponding to the display image, the display image displayed on the image display means. It is possible to make the player who recognizes the above guess the content of the special information corresponding to the displayed image and give the player a sense of expectation.

The inventions of the feature D group and the feature E group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various productions are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature F1]
A game ball launching means that launches a game ball into the game area,
A ball entry portion (second starting port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
A detection means for detecting the entry of a game ball into the entry portion,
When the game ball is launched by the game ball launching means with a firing intensity satisfying a predetermined firing strength, but the detection means does not detect the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion, a signal is output. Signal output means to output (abnormality detection processing in the fourth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, the state of the gaming machine can be detected based on the signal output by the signal output means. For example, when the ball entry portion is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched with a firing intensity satisfying a predetermined firing strength can easily enter, an abnormality of the gaming machine or an abnormality of the gaming machine is made based on the signal output by the signal output means. Unauthorized games can be detected. If the signal output from the signal output means is received, the event that the game ball launching means does not normally control the firing intensity of the game ball, or the ball entry portion or its surroundings is normal due to an illegality or abnormality. It is possible to detect various states of the gaming machine, such as an event in which the entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion is hindered instead of the abnormal state.

[Feature F2]
Feature The gaming machine described in F1.
Information acquisition means to acquire special information and
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The ball entry section (second starting port 34) is characterized in that the information acquisition means is a ball entry section in which the special information is acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry section. A game machine to play.

Frauds and abnormalities related to the ball entry section that acquires special information when a game ball enters are serious, and it is desirable to detect such frauds and abnormalities at an early stage. According to the feature F2, based on the signal output by the signal output means, it is possible to detect at an early stage an illegality or abnormality related to the ball entry portion that acquires special information when the game ball enters the ball.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
The signal output means is
When the detection means does not detect the entry of the game ball into the entry portion within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball with a firing intensity satisfying the predetermined launch condition. The signal is output (step S4206, step S4208).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F3, in the signal output means, the detection means enters the game ball into the ball entry portion within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball at a firing intensity satisfying a predetermined firing condition. Since a signal is output when it is not detected, it is possible to detect fraud or abnormality at an earlier stage based on the signal.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
The signal output means is
Based on the number of times that the detection means did not detect the entry of the game ball into the entry portion within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launched the game ball with a firing intensity satisfying the predetermined launch condition. And outputs the signal (step S4215).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F4, fraud and abnormality are effectively detected in a gaming machine that can occur in a normal state even when a gaming ball launched by a gaming ball launching means with a firing intensity that satisfies a predetermined firing strength does not enter the entry portion. can do.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F4.
It is an operation means that the player rotates to cause the game ball launching means to launch the game ball, and the game is played by the game ball launching means with a firing strength according to the rotation operation amount of the operating means by the player. Equipped with an operation means (operation handle 25) for firing a ball,
The firing intensity satisfying the predetermined firing condition is equivalent to the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means when the player rotates the operating means so that the rotation operation amount is maximized. A gaming machine characterized by the firing strength of.

According to the feature F5, the game launched with the same firing strength as the firing strength of the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means when the player rotates the operating means so that the rotation operation amount is the largest. When the ball entry portion is provided at a position where the ball can easily enter, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine or an illegal game based on the signal output by the signal output means.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F5.
It is an auxiliary operation means operated by the player to cause the game ball launching means to launch the game ball, and the game ball is launched to the game ball launching means with a predetermined firing strength by the operation of the auxiliary operation means by the player. Equipped with an auxiliary operation means (game ball launch button 26) to make it
A gaming machine characterized in that the firing intensity satisfying the predetermined firing intensity is the firing intensity of a gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means when the player operates the auxiliary operating means.

According to the feature F6, when the ball entry portion is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launch intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means is easily entered when the player operates the auxiliary operation means. In addition, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine or an illegal game based on the signal output by the signal output means.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group solves the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various processing and structural improvements are made for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

However, with these processes and improvements in the structure, there are problems such as problems with the gaming machine and the inability to prevent fraud by the player.

In such a gaming machine, in order to improve the soundness of the game while improving the interest of the game, it is preferable to be able to promptly detect a malfunction of the gaming machine, fraud by the player, and the like.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature G1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) is transferred to the first ball entry unit (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44). The first symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound light side MPU92), which displays fluctuations triggered by the establishment of the first fluctuation condition based on the entry of the ball,
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) is based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion (second starting port 34). The second symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound light side MPU92) that displays fluctuations triggered by the establishment of fluctuation conditions, and
While limiting the entry of the game ball into the second entry section, when the game ball enters the third entry section (through gate 35a), the game to the second entry section is performed. An entry restriction mechanism (non-electric accessory 34a) that allows the entry of a ball, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first ball entry portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the game ball entered into the third entry section is arranged at a position where the game ball enters the ball.

According to the feature G1, when the game ball enters the first entry portion after entering the third entry portion, the entry restriction mechanism enters the second entry portion of the game ball. It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second entry portion. As a result, it is possible to create a new game property such that the game ball can be entered into the second entry portion on condition that the game ball is entered into the first entry portion.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry section is arranged directly below the third ball entry section.

According to the feature G2, the guide flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entry section to the first entry section, and other game balls that have entered the third entry section are the first. It is possible to make a game ball that has entered the third entry portion into the first entry portion without providing a configuration for entering the ball into the entry portion of the above.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or the feature G2.
The first symbol control means stops and displays the first symbol when the first fluctuation time preset as the fluctuation time, which is the time for variable display of the first symbol, has elapsed.
The second symbol control means stops and displays the second symbol when the second fluctuation time preset as the fluctuation time, which is the time for variable display of the second symbol, has elapsed.
The gaming machine includes a variable time shortening means for executing a variable time shortening process for shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variable time.
The variation time shortening means is based on a combination of the second symbols that the second symbol control means stops and displays when the first symbol and the second symbol are variable display. A gaming machine characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute a fluctuation time shortening process.

According to the feature G3, the fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, for example, the first fluctuation time preset in a predetermined game time is executed. When the time is long, the variable time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with his or her concentration on the game in the predetermined game times. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in order to change and display the first symbol and the second symbol according to the configuration of the feature G1, the game ball is entered into the second entry portion on condition that the game ball enters the first entry portion. It is a condition to let the ball enter. Therefore, in order to execute the variation time shortening process described in the present feature G3, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the first entry portion and then enter the game ball into the second entry portion. It can be a condition and new playability can be created.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G3.
The variable time shortening means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the variable time shortening process is executed based on the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means. A gaming machine characterized by determining whether or not.

According to the feature G4, the variable time shortening means is based on the combination of the first symbol to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means when the first symbol and the second symbol are variable display. Decide whether to execute the variable time reduction process. Therefore, the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means is different depending on whether the variable time shortening process is executed or not. Therefore, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means by recognizing whether or not the variation time shortening process is executed, which is an expectation different from the conventional one. It is possible to give a feeling and playability.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Characteristic H1]
The first operating means (operation handle 25) and
The second operating means (game ball launch button 26) and
A game ball launching means (launch control device 80, game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball into a game area when the first operating means or the second operating means is operated.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game area is
It is an area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operating means is operated, and is launched by the gaming ball launching means when the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that a specific region (specific region SPA) reachable by the played pachinko ball is included.

According to the feature H1, the game area is an area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operating means is operated, and when the second operating means is operated. Since the game ball launched by the game ball launching means includes a specific area that can be reached, a new game property can be created by using the specific area. Since the specific area is an area reached only when the game ball is launched by operating the second operating means, it is necessary to create a game property in which the operation of the second operating means is indispensable. Can be done.

[Characteristic H2]
Feature The gaming machine described in H1.
The first operating means is
Equipped with a rotatable rotation operation unit
The game ball launching means
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the rotation operation unit.

According to the feature H2, the first operating means includes a rotation operating unit. Therefore, for example, when the second operating means is configured to cause the game ball launching means to launch the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operating methods of the first operating means and the second operating means are different. As a result, it is possible to create a game playability with various operability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic H3]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or the feature H2.
In the specific area,
It is determined that a specific ball entry portion (FIG. 71: second starting port 34) is provided so that the game ball launched by the game ball launching means can enter the ball when the second operating means is operated. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature H3, since a specific ball entry portion is provided in the specific area, the game property that the game ball is entered into the specific entry portion by operating the second operating means is created. can do. In other words, it is possible to create a game property in which the operation of the second operating means is indispensable in order to allow the game ball to enter a specific ball entry portion.

[Feature H4]
Feature The gaming machine described in H3,
Information acquisition means to acquire special information and
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entry section is a gaming machine characterized in that the information acquisition means is a ball entry section for acquiring the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. ..

According to the feature H4, the specific entry section is the entry section in which the information acquisition means acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry section. The entry of a gaming ball into the entry portion of the gaming machine can be an important factor in the playability of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of the second operating means for entering the gaming ball into a specific entry portion is the main feature of the gaming machine.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to the feature H3 or the feature H4.
A predetermined ball entry portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) that is a ball entry portion on which the game ball can enter and is different from the specific entry portion.
The first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) that starts the variable display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion.
The second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) that starts the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion.
Equipped with
The first symbol display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variablely displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature H5, when the first symbol has a variable display, when the player operates the second operating means to insert the game ball into a specific entry portion, the second symbol Starts the variable display and then shifts to the stop display. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variable display, it is possible to create a new game property in which the player operates the second operating means to stop and display the first symbol.

<Characteristic I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature I1]
The first operating means (operation handle 25) and
The second operating means (game ball launch button 26) and
A game ball launching means (launch control device 80, game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball into a game area when the first operating means or the second operating means is operated.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means by operating the second operating means may be launched by the gaming ball launching means by operating the first operating means. A gaming machine characterized by the firing strength of a gaming ball that cannot be achieved.

According to the feature I1, the firing intensity of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means when the second operating means is operated is fired by the game ball launching means when the first operating means is operated. Since it is the firing strength of the game ball that cannot be used, for example, only the game ball fired at the firing strength output by the game ball launching means can be involved in the accessory or the entry. By providing a game element such as a ball club, it is possible to create a new game property and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine described in Feature I1.
The firing intensity of the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means by operating the second operating means can be launched by the gaming ball launching means by operating the first operating means. A gaming machine characterized by being greater than the maximum firing intensity of a gaming ball.

According to feature I2, by operating the second operating means, the launching means is greater than the maximum firing intensity of the gaming ball that can be launched by the gaming ball launching means by operating the first operating means. Since the game ball can be launched with strength, for example, a game ball that can be launched by the game ball launching means by operating the first operating means by operating the second operating means. It is possible to create new game playability and improve the interest of the game by providing an accessory and a ball entry part in which only the game ball fired with a firing intensity larger than the maximum firing strength can be involved. can.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.
The first operating means is
Equipped with a rotatable rotation operation unit
The game ball launching means
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the rotation operation unit.

According to feature I3, the first operating means includes a rotating operating unit. Therefore, for example, when the second operating means is configured to cause the game ball launching means to launch the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operating methods of the first operating means and the second operating means are different. As a result, it is possible to create a game playability with various operability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to the feature I3.
The game area is
It is an area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operating means is operated, and is launched by the gaming ball launching means when the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that a specific region (specific region SPA) reachable by the played pachinko ball is included.

According to the feature I4, the game area is an area where the game ball launched by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operating means is operated, and when the second operating means is operated. Since the game ball launched by the game ball launching means includes a specific area that can be reached, a new game property can be created by using the specific area. Since the specific area is an area reached only when the game ball is launched by operating the second operating means, it is necessary to create a game property in which the operation of the second operating means is indispensable. Can be done.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine described in Feature I4.
In the specific area,
It is determined that a specific ball entry portion (FIG. 71: second starting port 34) is provided so that the game ball launched by the game ball launching means can enter the ball when the second operating means is operated. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature I5, since a specific ball entry portion is provided in the specific area, the game property that the game ball is entered into the specific entry portion by operating the second operating means is created. can do. In other words, it is possible to create a game property in which the operation of the second operating means is indispensable in order to allow the game ball to enter a specific ball entry portion.

[Feature I6]
The gaming machine described in Feature I5.
Information acquisition means to acquire special information and
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entry section is a gaming machine characterized in that the information acquisition means is a ball entry section for acquiring the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. ..

According to the feature I6, since the specific entry section is the entry section in which the information acquisition means acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry section, the specific entry section is specified. The entry of a gaming ball into the entry portion of the gaming machine can be an important factor in the playability of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation of the second operating means for entering the gaming ball into a specific entry portion is the main feature of the gaming machine.

[Feature I7]
The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6.
A predetermined ball entry portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) that is a ball entry portion on which the game ball can enter and is different from the specific entry portion.
The first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) that starts the variable display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion.
The second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) that starts the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion.
Equipped with
The first symbol display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variablely displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature I7, when the first symbol has a variable display, when the player operates the second operating means to insert the game ball into a specific entry portion, the second symbol Starts the variable display and then shifts to the stop display. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variable display, it is possible to create a new game property in which the player operates the second operating means to stop and display the first symbol.

<Characteristic J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature J1]
A game ball launching means for launching a game ball,
A first guiding means (FIG. 72: guide rail 31) for guiding the game ball launched from the game ball launching means, and
A distribution area in which a game ball launched from the game ball launching means and in which the game ball released from the first guiding means is distributed,
A second guiding means (FIG. 72: distribution mechanism 34b, guide rail) for guiding a game ball that is launched by the game ball launching means and has not been released from the first guiding means into the distribution region. 34c) and
A specific entry portion (FIG. 72: second starting port 34d) into which a game ball guided by the second guiding means can enter, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, a second guiding means and a second guiding means for guiding the gaming ball, which is a gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means and has not been released into the distribution area from the first guiding means. Since the game ball guided by the ball is provided with a specific ball entry section, for example, a game element related to the playability of the game machine, such as a production, operation of a character, and a lottery process, is included in the ball entry section. It is possible to create new playability by executing the ball as an opportunity to enter the ball.

[Feature J2]
Feature J1 is the gaming machine described in
Information acquisition means to acquire special information and
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entry section is a gaming machine characterized in that the information acquisition means is a ball entry section for acquiring the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. ..

According to the feature J2, the specific entry section is the entry section in which the information acquisition means acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry section. The entry of a gaming ball into the entry portion of the gaming machine can be an important factor in the playability of the gaming machine.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2.
A ball entry portion on which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined entry portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) provided in the distribution area.
The first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) that starts the variable display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion.
The second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) that starts the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion.
Equipped with
The first symbol display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variablely displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature J3, when the game ball is put into a specific entry portion when the first symbol is in the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display and then the stop display is displayed. Transition. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol has a variable display, it is possible to create a new game property such that the first symbol is stopped and displayed by inserting the game ball into a specific entry portion.

<Characteristic K group>
Feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature K1]
The first operating means (operation handle 25) and
The second operating means (game ball launch button 26) and
A game ball launching means (launch control device 80, game ball launching mechanism 81) that launches a game ball when the first operating means or the second operating means is operated.
A first guiding means (guide rail 31) for guiding the game ball launched from the game ball launching means, and
A distribution area in which a game ball launched from the game ball launching means and in which the game ball released from the first guiding means is distributed,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first operating means is also configured so that the game ball launched by the game ball launching means can be released from the first guiding means by operating the first operating means. Regardless
The second operating means is characterized in that the gaming ball launched by the gaming ball launching means is not discharged from the first guiding means by operating the second operating means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature K1, since the game ball launched by the game ball launching means is not discharged from the first guiding means by operating the second operating means, the operation of the second operating means is performed. By providing an accessory or a ball entry section in which a game ball launched can be involved, a new game property can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature K2]
Features The gaming machine described in K1.
The first operating means is
Equipped with a rotatable rotation operation unit
The game ball launching means
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the rotation operation unit.

According to the feature K2, the first operating means includes a rotation operating unit. Therefore, for example, when the second operating means is configured to cause the game ball launching means to launch the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operating methods of the first operating means and the second operating means are different. As a result, it is possible to create a game playability with various operability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2.
A second guiding means (FIG. 72: distribution mechanism 34b, guide rail) for guiding a game ball that is launched by the game ball launching means and has not been released from the first guiding means into the distribution region. 34c) and
A specific entry portion (second starting port 34d) into which a game ball guided by the second guidance means can enter, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K3, a second guiding means for guiding the game ball not released from the first guiding means into the distribution area and a specific entry in which the game ball guided by the second guiding means can enter. Since it is provided with a ball portion, in order to allow the game ball to enter a specific entry portion, a first operating means or a second operating means is provided so that the game ball is not discharged from the first guiding means into the distribution area. It is possible to create new playability such as operation.

[Feature K4]
Features A gaming machine described in K3,
Information acquisition means to acquire special information and
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entry section is a gaming machine characterized in that the information acquisition means is a ball entry section for acquiring the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. ..

According to the feature K4, the specific entry section is the entry section in which the information acquisition means acquires special information when the game ball enters the specific entry section. The entry of a gaming ball into the entry portion of the gaming machine can be an important factor in the playability of the gaming machine. As a result, in order to allow the gaming ball to enter a specific entry portion, the main feature of the gaming machine is to operate the gaming machine so that the gaming ball is not released from the first guiding means into the distribution area. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is.

[Feature K5]
The gaming machine according to feature K3 or feature K4.
A ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined entry portion (center side first start port 33, right side first start port 44) provided in the distribution area.
The first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) that starts the variable display of the first symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion.
The second symbol display means (second symbol display unit 37b) that starts the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific entry portion.
Equipped with
The first symbol display means is
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variablely displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the second symbol display means stops and displays the second symbol. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature K5, when the game ball is put into a specific entry portion when the first symbol is in the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display and then the stop display is displayed. Transition. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol has a variable display, it is possible to create a new game property such that the first symbol is stopped and displayed by inserting the game ball into a specific entry portion.

The inventions of the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various processing and structural improvements are made for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of creating new playability.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature K group are appropriately combined may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. A unit, an acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry section, and the information acquisition means acquired when the game ball has entered the starting ball entry section. A gaming machine equipped with a storage means for storing special information.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each of the embodiments described in the column of the outline of the invention, the technical features in the modifications are for solving a part or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned above. It is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate to achieve some or all of the effects. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be appropriately deleted.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... Weight button 25c ... Variable resistor 26 ... Game ball launch button 30 ... Game board 31 ... Guidance rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... Central side 1st starting port 34 ... 2nd starting port 34a ... Non-electric accessory 34b ... Distribution mechanism 34c ... Induction rail 34d ... 2nd Starting port 35a ... Through gate 35b ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display unit 37b ... 2nd symbol display unit 37c ... 1st hold display unit 38 ... Normal diagram unit 39 ... Round display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 .. Liquid crystal display device 41a ... Display surface 41b ... First liquid crystal display area 41c ... Second liquid crystal display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 44 ... Right first Starting port 44a ... Electric accessory 44b ... Electric accessory drive unit 45 ... Main display unit 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... 1st control unit 52 ... 2nd Control unit 53 ... 3rd control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main control device 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
63a ... Win / fail table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach judgment table storage area 63d ... Fluctuation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command Information storage area 64 ... Main RAM
64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Judgment processing execution area 64d ... Electric service holding area 64e ... Electric service execution area 64f ... Various counter areas 64g ... Various flag storage area 64h ... Destination judgment processing result storage area 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply Device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice emission control device 91 ... Voice emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Variable display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound / light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
150 ... Distribution mechanism 151 ... Ball entry part 152 ... Blade part 153 ... Shaft part 154 ... Ball exit part 155 ... Ball exit part Sync1 ... First synchronization display part Sync2. .. 2nd synchronization display

Claims (4)

A first symbol control means for variablely displaying the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display device, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry portion.
A second symbol control means for variablely displaying the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display device, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second symbol control means starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means variablely displays the first symbol.
The first symbol control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it prohibits the second symbol control means from starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is variablely displayed. .. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The first symbol control means is
When the second symbol control means variablely displays the second symbol, and the combination of the second symbols displayed by the second symbol control means is a combination satisfying a specific condition. Only, a gaming machine characterized in that it is prohibited to start the variable display of the first symbol. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The first symbol control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first symbol is variablely displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed when the gaming ball enters the second entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The second ball entry portion is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position that allows a player to intentionally enter a gaming ball.

Images